You are on page 1of 282

Distribution

and Power

Distribution and Power - International version


International version

TECHNICAL MANUAL
World Headquarters and International
Department
87045 LIMOGES CEDEX FRANCE
☎ : 33 5 55 06 87 87
Fax : 33 5 55 06 74 55
Welcome to the first edition of the Protection and Power Guide
from Legrand, which will make life easier for you, day in and day out.

This document serves as both a memorandum and a practical


guide, combining comprehensive information which is both technical
(performance, equipment operation, etc) and practical (instructions
for use, advantages, etc) to guide you when making your selections,
with the best of Legrand solutions.

A powerful specification tool, it integrates a complete approach


which is as exhaustive as possible concerning the functions and
constraints of installations, and helps you always make the optimum
choice in complete confidence.

A guide to our commitment, it illustrates Legrand’s willingness


to be at your side, offering the best product offer with the best
services: XL PRO2, training, technical support, etc,
in order to develop and deepen our relationship.

1
Contents

2
››› Technical part
PROTECTION DEVICES general 4

DMX-E air circuit breakers 18

DPX moulded case circuit breakers 36

DX modular circuit breakers 74

ASSOCIATION of protective devices 82

VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTORS 102

ISOLATION 130

DISTRIBUTION 134

XL3 enclosures 154

››› Offer part


DMX-E 171

DPX 176

ISOLATING SWITCHES 200

LR RCDS 216

MODULAR DIN-RAIL EQUIPMENT 221

VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTOR 238

DISTRIBUTION 240

XL3 248

3
Protection
devices:
general

DMX-E ACBs, DPX MCCBs and

DX MCBs: in a fully integrated

protection range

4
The choice of a protection device must provide the best possible continuity while also taking into account
two compulsory objectives: protecting people and protecting installations.

TECHNICAL PART
On the other hand the choice of a switching device (isolation, functional breaking, emergency breaking)
does not have this automatic protection role as its main objective.

People must be protected against indirect contact


according to the earthing system and the
characteristics of the installation (such as length
of lines). The purpose of protecting cables is to limit
the effects of overloads and short circuits.
The concept of discrimination relates to the aspects
of discrimination between protective devices.

Protection devices protect installations and people:


these are the circuit-breakers and fuses. DX, DPX
and DMX-E circuit-breakers perform both a
breaking and a protection function. Switching
devices are used to control the various circuits
in an installation: these are the isolating switches,
contactors and even other devices (such as
thermostats, latching relays, etc) if the switching
only has a functional role.
Protection devices for people and installation protection

Product standards
Installation standards

It is important to distinguish between product


standards and installation standards.
Product standards concern devices and are
the responsibility of manufacturers, whereas
installation standards relate to installations:
ensuring their correct operation, safety and
durability. It is the duty of installers to apply
them but, in addition, they must also
guarantee the overall performance level of FOR MORE INFORMATION
the installation (from the main LV distribution
board to the socket) relying on the quality of See the on-line catalogue:
products and the guarantees that only a instructions, technical data
major manufacturer can provide. sheets, etc.

5
Protection devices:
general (continued)

LEGRAND CIRCUIT BREAKERS: DMX-E, DPX & DX


A circuit breaker is both a control device which THE TECHNOLOGIES USED
can make, withstand and switch currents whose
intensity is at most equal to its nominal current Overcurrents are detected by three different
(In), and a protection device which can technologies:
automatically break overcurrents which may occur - thermal for overloads,
as a result of faults in installations. Legrand - magnetic for short-circuits,
circuit breakers are divided into three main - electronic for both.
categories: DMX-E ACBs, DPX MCCBs (moulded Thermal and magnetic releases, which are usually
cases), and DX MCBs (modular). The choice combined (thermal magnetic MCBs), use a tried
of the characteristics of a circuit breaker depends and tested, cost effective technology, but provide
on the size of the installation. less flexibility of adjustment and fewer features
than electronic releases.

Thermal release
This consists of a bimetallic strip which bends
Legrand circuit breakers also when heated beyond the normal operating values,
thus releasing the lock which holds the main
perform the following functions: contacts. The reaction time of a bimetallic strip
is in inverse proportion to the intensity of the
- Manual or automatic control current.
of a circuit As a result of its thermal inertia, each reclosing
- Isolation with positive contact indica- of the faulty circuit reduces its reaction time.
tion and visible contact indication for DPX MCCBs and ACBs can be used to set the trip
plug-in and draw-out devices and for current Ir between certain limits (0.4 to 1 x In
DPX-IS depending on the model).
- Emergency breaking
- Residual current protection
Magnetic release
This consists of a magnetic loop whose effect
releases the lock which holds the main contacts,
thus triggering a break if there is a high overcurrent.
The response time is very short (a few hundredths
of a second). DPX MCCBs have a magnetic setting
Im (up to 10 x Ir), which can be used to set the
release value to the protection conditions of the
installation (fault current and indirect contact).
Moreover, this setting can be used to find the best
discrimination conditions between the devices.

6
The electronic release
A coil, placed on each conductor, constantly measures

TECHNICAL PART
the current in each conductor. This information is Typical tripping curves
processed by an electronic module which controls
the tripping of the CB when the values of the
settings are exceeded. The curve of the release t
shows three zones of operation. Electronic releases
are available on DPX and DMX-E breakers.

- “Long time delay” operating zone


This is similar to the characteristic of a thermal
release. It protects conductors against overloads.
- “Short time delay” operating zone
This provides protection against lower intensity
short-circuits, generally at the end of the line.
Thermal Magnetic I
The trip threshold can usually be adjusted.
release release
The period of the delay may be increased zone zone
by thresholds up to one second, mainly used
to ensure discrimination with devices placed Thermal-magnetic release
downstream.
- “Instantaneous” operating zone
This provides protection against high intensity t
short-circuits. It is factory set at a fixed value
depending on the model.

Long Short Instantaneous I


delay delay operating
operating operating zone
zone zone

Electronic release

FOR MORE INFORMATION


Other electronic protection
units on request

7
Protection devices:
general (continued)

The electric arc


The current is broken in the circuit breaker arc
chamber, which is designed to control the electric I
arc produced when the contacts open (rather like Prospective
Isc
electrodes). Energy
The arc energy can become considerable, up to Limited limiting
Isc
100 kilojoules and 20,000 °C, and can cause the
contacts to be eroded by vaporising the metal.
It is therefore a good idea to extinguish the arc as
U t
quickly as possible, to limit its effects.
The magnetic field produced by the arc (which Arc U
is a conductor) is used to move it into an “arc Mains U
chamber” and extend it until it has been
extinguished. The circuit breaker mechanisms
Restored
must combine very quick contact opening (limiting voltage
erosion) and high contact pressure (opposition to
the electrodynamic forces). t

8
BREAKER CHARACTERISTICS

TECHNICAL PART
Rated operating voltage Ue (in V) Following the test, the circuit breaker must
This is the voltage(s) at which the circuit breaker continue to offer a guaranteed minimum level
can be used. The value indicated is usually the of safety (isolation, dielectric strength).
maximum value. In standard IEC 60898, the device breaking
At lower voltages, certain characteristics may capacity is tested in the same way but is called Icn.
differ, or even be improved, such as the breaking After the test, the circuit breaker must retain its
capacity. dielectric properties and able to trip in accordance
with the specifications in the standard.
Rated insulation voltage Ui (in V)
This value acts as a reference for the device
insulation performance. High voltage tests
(Impulse, industrial frequency) are determined
on this basis.
Breaking capacity
Impulse voltage Uimp (in kV) Modular circuit breakers are often identified
This value characterises the ability of the device to with two breaking capacities.
withstand transient overvoltages due to lightning, This distinction results from standards using
for example. different test conditions.

Nominal current In (in A) • 10000 : standard IEC 60898 for household


or analogue applications where unqualified
This is the maximum current value the circuit
people can close a circuit with a persistent
breaker can withstand on a permanent basis.
fault several times. The breaking capacity (in
This value is always given for an ambient
Amps) then appears in a box, with no mention
temperature around the device of 40 °C in
of the unit.
accordance with standard IEC 60947-2, and 30 °C
in accordance with standard IEC 60898. If the • 10 kA: standard IEC 60947-2 for all applica-
device is used at a higher temperature, it may be tions where the maintenance personnel are
necessary to reduce the rated current. suitably qualified.
The breaking capacity then appears along
Ultimate breaking capacity Icu (in kA) with its unit (kA).
This is the maximum short-circuit current value
that a circuit breaker can break at a given voltage
and phase shift (cos ϕ).
The tests are executed according to the sequence
O - t - CO; O represents a break operation, t an
interval of time and CO a make operation followed
by an automatic break operation.

9
Protection devices:
general (continued)

BREAKER CHARACTERISTICS (continued)


Standard breaking capacity Ics Rated short-circuit making
This is the value expressed as a percentage of Icu, capacity Icm (kA peak)
from the following values: 25% (category A only), This is the maximum current intensity a device
50%, 75% or 100%. The circuit breaker must be can make at its rated voltage according to the
capable of operating normally after breaking the conditions of the standard.
Ics current several times using the sequence Devices without a protection function, such as
O-CO-CO. switches, must be able to withstand short-circuit
Standard IEC 60898 gives the minimum values currents with a value and duration resulting from
to be attained according to the device Icn. the action of the associated protection device.

Short time withstand current Icw Utilization category


(in kA) IEC 60947-2 designates circuit breakers
This is the value of the short-circuit current that a as belonging to one of two categories:
category B circuit breaker (see below) is capable of - category A for circuit breakers which do not have
withstanding for a defined period without altering a time delay before tripping on a short-circuit
its characteristics. - category B for circuit breakers which have a time
This value is intended to enable discrimination delay. This can be adjusted in order to perform
between devices. The relevant circuit breaker can time discrimination for a short-circuit value less
remain closed while the fault is eliminated by the than Icw. The value of Icw must be at least equal
downstream device as long as the energy I2t does to the larger of the two values, 12 In or 5 kA,
not exceed Icw2 (1 s). This value is one of the most for circuit breakers with a rated current of 2,500 A
characteristic values of a switch. at most, and 30 kA thereafter.

By convention the value Icw is given for a time


t = 1 s. For a different duration t, this should be
indicated, for example Icw0.2. It is then necessary
to check that the thermal stress I2t, generated
until the downstream device breaks, is actually
less than Icw2t.

10
TECHNICAL PART
Product standards
There are two product standards for circuit breakers: standard IEC 60898 and standard IEC 60947.

››› Standard IEC 60898


In practice, this standard is referred to for domestic and residential installations, small commercial
installations and all situations where people are unqualified.
It applies up to 125 A, 25,000 A breaking capacity and 440 V.
Thermal tripping occurs between 1.05 and 1.3 x In.
It determines operating ranges B, C and D for the magnetic trip zone.

››› Standard IEC 60947-2


The standard used in industry, this assumes that maintenance workers are qualified.
It does not determine the operating range: all characteristics (Ir, Im, t, etc) can be adjusted.
For Ir = In, tripping resulting from overloads should occur between 1.13 and 1.45 x In.
Products complying with standard IEC 60898 can also be used in industrial installations to the extent that
their characteristics allow.

Legrand DX circuit breakers comply with the following standards.

››› Standard IEC 61009-1


This applies to circuit breakers with a residual current function.

››› Standard IEC 61008-1


This applies switches with residual current fonction.

11
Protection devices:
general (continued)

LIMITING
In the event of a short-circuit, without any Current limiting curves
protection, the current flowing through the
installation would be the prospective short-circuit These give the maximum peak current values
current. When a short-circuit current crosses a (in  peak), limited by the devices according to the
circuit breaker, this has the capacity, to a greater value of the prospective short-circuit current.
or lesser extent, to allow only part of this current The limited current values are used to determine
to flow. The short-circuit is then limited in the size of the busbars and to check the withstand
amplitude and duration. of conductors and devices.

The purpose of limiting is to reduce:


- thermal stress Current limiting curve
- electrodynamic forces
- effects of electromagnetic induction
In addition, it makes discrimination and
association easier. The limiting power of devices is
represented in the form of limiting curves. Peak Isc (Â)

Isc
e ak
dp
ite
lim
Limited Un
Prospective short-circuit current limiting peak Isc

Prospective
rms Isc
Isc
Prospective Isc at the Device breaking
Prospective device terminals capacity
peak Isc
Prospective
Isc
Prospective
rms Isc

Limited
peak Isc
Limited
Isc

12
TECHNICAL PART
Thermal stress limiting curves
Limiting class for modular circuit breakers
These give the image of the energy (in that A2s)
the device allows to flow depending on Appendix ZA of standard IEC 60898 defines
the prospective short-circuit current. the thermal stress limiting classes for ratings
They can be used to check the thermal stress of 32 A or less. The limiting classes are used
withstand of cables protected by the device. to assign hierarchical priority to thermal
stress limit capacities.

Example for a 6 kA type C circuit breaker from


Thermal stress limiting curve 20 to 32 A:
- class 1: unlimited thermal stress
- class 2: thermal stress limited to
160,000 A2s maximum
I2t (A2s)
Thermal stress curve - class 3: thermal stress limited to
permitted by the cable 55,000 A2s maximum
All Legrand circuit breakers rated up to 32 A
or less are class 3.
Device
breaking
capacity

Icc (A)
Thermal Magnetic
trip zone trip zone

13
Protection devices:
general (continued)

RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES


The residual current device continuously measures Current-sensing relay
the difference between the value of the outward The current-sensing relay consists of a magnetised
current and the value of the return current on the coil which, as long as no fault current is present,
circuit it is protecting. If this difference is other holds a vane in the closed position.
than zero, it means that there is a leak or This vane is fixed on a shaft and is subject to the
insulation fault. When this value reaches the level force from a spring.
at which the residual current device has been set, As long as the coil is not excited by a current,
the circuit power supply is broken automatically. the permanent magnet opposes a force holding
the vane which is greater than the force of the
COMPOSITION AND OPERATION spring. If the coil is excited, the induced magnetic
OF RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES flux opposes the permanent magnetisation.
An electromagnetic residual current device The force generated by the spring then drives the
consists primarily of a core and a current-sensing movement of the vane which controls the contact
relay. opening mechanism.

Magnetic core
The magnetic core works like a transformer.
The primary measures all the currents on the Residual current principle
circuit being monitored, the secondary powers
the current-sensing relay. If there is a leakage
or fault current, the vectorial sum of the currents N L

is not zero and results in a residual current. Above


the preset threshold I∆n, the current-sensing relay
controls opening of the main contacts of the
associated breaking device (switch or circuit 2 1
breaker).

RCBO phase + neutral

Current- Magnetic
sensing core
relay

14
TECHNICAL PART
Operating principle

Without a fault With fault present

N L
N L

2 1
2 1

2=- 1

2= 1
1+ 2=0

1+ 2= d

Id

The value of the outward current (phase) is The value of the outward current (phase)
the same as the value of the return current is different from the value of the return
(neutral). If there is no residual current, current (neutral). The residual current
no magnetic flux is created in the core. causes magnetic flux in the core, which
The current-sensing relay coil is not excited. generates a current that will excite the
The contacts remain closed. The device current-sensing relay.
works normally.

15
Protection devices:
general (continued)

RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES (continued)

SELECTING RESIDUAL CURRENT


DEVICES Residual current devices are equipped
with a “test” button. This simulates a
The choice of a residual current device depends fault current. A test should be perfor-
on the required level of protection (I∆n sensitivity), med once a month.
on the nature of the associated breaking device
(circuit breaker or switch) and the specific
conditions of use (delayed, discriminating,
immune).
> Residual current device with overcurrent > Residual current circuit breaker
protection
This both breaks This is used to break the
the circuit and circuit in the event of a
protects against residual current fault but does
overcurrents not provide protection against
(overloads and overcurrents. A protection
short-circuits). device, such as a circuit
> Residual current breaker or fuse, must
› Four-pole monobloc RCBOs circuit breaker therefore be associated with it,
with 4 modules only up to 32 A which will also protect the
switch (see page 75).
It exists in several
forms:
- modular monobloc
- add-on module Residual current relays with separate core
for modular device
- associable add-on
module
(mounted on side
› Add-on module or underneath)
for modular circuit breakers for DPX
- residual current
relay with
separate core

These add a residual current function


to DPX and DMX-E circuit breakers and
› Side-mounted add-on module switches equipped with trip coils.
Cat. No. 260 36 associated
with a DPX 250 ER

16
TECHNICAL PART
Specific conditions of use • Hpi version (high level of immunity) Hpi
There are two types of residual current device: This is a variant of type A with reinforced immunity
to transient phenomena.
It is therefore particularly suitable for installations
Type AC producing electrical interference.
Used for standard applications Its minimal sensitivity to permanent leakage
without DC components currents makes it more specifically suitable for
present. installations supplying computers and avoids the
need for multiple divisions
of circuits. This enables the number of residual
current protection devices to be reduced.
Type A
Used when the loads distort
the signal (the current is not The residual current trip thresholds
a perfect sine wave or has are usually guaranteed for a low
a DC component); they are temperature down to – 5 °C.
recommended for the For some versions,
protection of electronic especially “Hpi”,
equipment, computers, or
fluorescent lighting devices etc.
they are guaranteed
down to – 25 °C.
-25
A special mark
indicates this.
Each type of residual current device can be obtained in:
• “Standard” version
Tripping is deemed to be instantaneous.
• “S” version (discriminating or delayed) Discrimination between residual current
devices See page 101
Tripping is delayed to enable discrimination with
other downstream residual current devices.

17
DMX-E
air circuit
breakers

DMX-E circuit breakers

and isolating switches

provide protection or control

at the head of low voltage

distribution installations

up to 4000 A.

Find the complete offer


on page 171

18
DMX-E AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS

TECHNICAL PART
The technology of the “air” circuit breaker has units have evolved in line with these general
improved considerably: in fact breaking does not developments.
really take place in the open air anymore, but in They are used to protect the most powerful
sophisticated arcing chambers, and the equipment installations (up to 4000 A). Their ease of
has become a great deal smaller. installation and clarity of layout have been
At the same time, their specific characteristics particularly carefully studied. All devices in the
(electrical and mechanical strength, breaking DMX-E range are mounted behind the same front
capacity, maintainability, optional accessories, etc) panel and have same depth and height.
have also been developed. The new Legrand DMX-E

A 4000 A system within your reach

DMX-E INTEGRATION
• Fixed or • Clear, easy mounting
draw-out • All DMX-E have the same front panel,
• Circuit and are the same depth and height.
breaker
with MP2G
integrated
electronic CONNECTION AND IDENTIFICATION
protection
unit.
OF AUXILIARIES
• On front panel terminal block
• 32 connection points available
• Identification on front panel
• Accessories attached via front panel for extremely
easy installation.
OPTION
• MP3
electronic CONTROL AND SIGNALLING
protection
unit with
AUXILIARIES
advanced • Shunt release • Closing release
functions.
• Under voltage release • Signalling contacts
• Motor operator • Locking options

19
DMX-E
air circuit breakers (continued)

THE DMX-E RANGE


FOR MORE INFORMATION
The designation of DMX-E corresponds to its
breaking capacity at 415 VA. So the DMX-E55 See the on-line catalogue:
offers a breaking capacity (Icu at 415 VA) of 55 kA, instructions, technical data sheets, etc.
DMX-E 65, DMX-E 80 & DMX-E 100 a breaking
capacity of 65 kA, 80 kA & 100 kA.

DMX circuit breakers and isolating swiches are


One catalogue number = one complete available in three sizes of device:
product
- DMX-E 55 & DMX-E 65 up to 1600 A
• All breakers are delivered with a breaking capacity of 55 kA & 65 kA
as standard with: - DMX-E 65 (2000 & 2500 A) & DMX-E 80
(All ratings)
- MP2G electronic trip unit - DMX-E 65 (3200 & 4000 A) & DMX-E 100
- Auxiliary contacts 4NO+4NC (All ratings).
- Rear connection
- Auxiliary terminal block All DMX, both circuit breakers and switches,
- Padlocking shroud for ON and OFF buttons are available in 3P and 4P arrangement and
- Lifting hooks in fixed and draw-out version.
- Panel door seal
In comparison with the fixed version, the draw-out
• For draw-out, the following features version has additional locking facilities, optimum
are delivered as standard as well: safety when work is being carried out on them
(padlocking and physical separation of the
- Safety shutters installation) or on the installation and is easily
- Racking handle interchangeable for maintenance purpose (no
- Terminal adaptor disconnection to be carried out).

20
ELECTRONIC TRIP UNITS Protection unit

TECHNICAL PART
In addition to the integration capabilities of these t
circuit breakers, their easy mounting and lr
connection, strength and the maximum continuity
Tr
of operation they provide, they also have modern
protection units which enable very precise setting ls
of protection conditions while maintaining total Ts
lg lp
discrimination with downstream breakers. Tg

MP2G electronic protection unit I

The settings are adjusted using rotary selector


DMX-E circuit breakers are equipped with the MP2G
switches:
electronic protection unit as standard.
- Overload protection:
Ir from 0.4 to 1.0 x In (10 steps)
- Overload protection operation time:
Manual Tr up to 30 s (10 steps)
Reset - Short-circuit protection:
Is from 0.6 to 10.0 x In (10 steps)
% load
indication - Short-circuit protection operation time:
Overload Power On Ts up to 400 ms (5 steps)
protection indication - Very high short-circuit
settings Instantaneous protection:
(current & time) Fault
Ip from 1.5 to 12.0 x Ir (10 steps)
indications
Short-circuit - Neutral protection (0% - 50% - 100%)
protection
settings
- Ground fault protection:
(current & time) Ig from 0.2 to 0.6 x Ir with a time delay Tg up to 10 s.
Instantaneous
This feature can be disabled when not needed.
setting
Thermal
Ground fault
reflexivity
protection
& neutral
settings
protection
(current & time)
setting

Protection
unit testing Features of MP2G:
- Overload, short-circuit and ground fault
protection with adjustable current and time
- Very high current protection
- Neutral protection (0 % - 50 % - 100 %)
- Switchable thermal reflexivity
- Segregated fault signals
- True RMS measurement

21
DMX-E
air circuit breakers (continued)

DMX-E tripping curve

10 000 0.4 0.8

0.5 0.9

0.6 1.0

0.7

1000

100

30s 30s

0.5s
Trip Time (s)

10

0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
1.5 4.0
0.6 1.0 6.0
2.0
0.5s
8.0
1 1.0 10.0

9.0

0.4

0.1 0.1
Ir 0.1

Tr 1.5 2.0
5.0
3.0
Ig 4.0
6.0 8.0
10.0
Is 12.0

Ig
0.01
Ip
0.05 0.1 1 2.4 6 10 50
Current Multiples (x In)

22
MP2G characterics

TECHNICAL PART
Parameters Settings

Ir Ir = In x … 0.4 - 0.5 - 0.6 - 0.7 - 0.75 - 0.8 - 0.85 - 0.9 - 0.95 - 1


Overload Tr Time delay in s at 6 x Ir 0.5 - 1 - 2 - 4 - 6 - 8 - 12 - 18 - 24 - 30
Neutral protection IN = Ir x … 0 % - 50 % - 100 %
Is Is = In x … 0.6 - 1 - 1.5 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 6 - 8 - 9 - 10
Short-circuit Time delay in ms at 10 x In - I2t Off 20 - 100 - 200 - 300 - 400
Ts
Time delay in ms at 10 x In - I2t On 20 - 100 - 200 - 300 - 400
Instantaneous Ip Ip = Ir x … 1.5 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 8 - 10 - 12 - Max.
Ig Ig = Ir x … 0.2 - 0.3 - 0.4 - 0.5 - 0.6
Ground fault Time delay in s - I2t Off 0.1 - 0.2 - 0.3 - 0.4 - 1 - Off
Tg
Time delay in s - I2t On 0.1 - 0.2 - 0.3 - 0.4
Thermal memory On/Off

Discrimination with downstream breakers


See page 90

DMX-E 2500 A 4P
Draw-out version

FOR MORE INFORMATION

Other electronic protection units on request

23
DMX-E
air circuit breakers (continued)

CONTROL ACCESSORIES

Closing release Shunt release

Operation counter

Contact indicating
readiness to close

Shunt releases Undervoltage releases


Shunt releases are devices used for the remote Undervoltage releases are devices which are
instantaneous opening of the device. generally controlled by a NC type contact. They
These devices are available in AC and DC versions, trigger instantaneous opening of the circuit
with various supply voltages. breaker if their supply voltage drops below a
They are simply clipped on to the front panel certain threshold and in particular if the control
of the device. No tool is required. contact opens.
Nominal voltage: 24, 30, 110, 220, 250 V=, These releases are equipped with an energy saving
110, 220, 240, 380, 415 VA 50/60 Hz device for limiting their consumption in spite
of continuous supply.
Maximum power consumption: 650 VA
They are simply clipped on to the front panel
Operating voltage limit: 70% - 110% of the device. No tool is required.
Nominal voltage: 24, 30, 110, 220, 250 V=,
110, 220, 240, 380, 415 VA 50/60 Hz
Maximum power consumption: 650 VA – 0.5 s
Operating voltage limit: 85% - 110%

24
Time delayed undervoltage releases Motor operators
These releases are equipped with an electronic Motor operators, which are available in different

TECHNICAL PART
device which delays their operation for 3 seconds. voltages, are used for remotely charging the
They are designed to be used in unstable supplies, closing springs of the circuit breaker.
where the supply voltage of the release may be Combined with an opening release (shunt trip
subject to variations or micro-breaks, to avoid or undervoltage release) and a closing release,
unwanted opening of the circuit breaker. they can thus be used for remotely controlling
They are also equipped with a power saving device the circuit breaker.
for limiting their consumption. They are easy to mount, with three screws.
They are simply clipped on to the front panel of the Nominal voltage: 24, 30, 48, 60, 110, 125, 250 V=,
device. No tool is required. 110, 220, 240, 380, 415 VA 50/60 Hz
Nominal voltage: 48, 110 V=, 110, 220, 240, 380, Maximum power consumption: 300 VA
415 VA 50/60 Hz Operating voltage limit: 85% - 110%
Maximum power consumption: 650 VA – 0.5 s
Operating voltage limit: 85% - 110%
Number of control auxiliaries for DMX-E

Closing releases Shunt release 1


These coils are used to remotely control
the closing of the circuit breaker (the circuit Undervoltage release or delayed
1
breaker being dependent on the prior loading undervoltage release
of the springs). Closing release 1
They are controlled by an N/O type contact.
They are simply clipped on to the front panel
of the device. No tool is required.
Nominal voltage: 24, 30, 110, 220, 250 V=,
110, 220, 240, 380, 415 VA 50/60 Hz
Maximum power consumption: 650 VA
Operating voltage limit: 85% - 110%

Closing release Motor operator

25
DMX-E
air circuit breakers (continued)

SIGNALLING ACCESSORIES
Signalling contacts
All DMX-E are equipped as standard “Ready to Close” contact
with 8 auxiliary contacts (4NO+4NC).

A fault signal contact can be added to indicate • This switch changes state when:
a fault trip (Cat.No 626317). This contact
remains closed until the device is reset. - All arc chambers are secured
They are simply clipped on to the front panel - Undervoltage release is energised
of the device. No tool is required. - Closing spring is charged
- Racking shutter is closed
Shunt release action and undervoltage release - Shunt release is un-energised
action signal contact (Cat.Nos 626315 & 626316) - Breaker or switch is in Off condition
can also be added to provide indication of tripping
due to the shunt release or undervoltage release
respectively. This contact remains closed until the
device is reset.

Finally, DMX-E devices can be equipped with a SAFETY AND PADLOCKING


“Ready to close” contact (Cat.No 626318).
ACCESSORIES
Position indicating contacts The DMX-E circuit breakers and switches draw-out
types are delivered as standard with safety
An additional block of 8 changeover contacts padlocking shutters preventing access to live
(Cat.No 626311) can be fitted on the draw-out terminals. They have a number of other safety
versions to indicate the position of the device devices.
in its base (connected / test / isolated).
- Using padlocks:
- ON/OFF buttons
- Racking shutter
- Access to the protection unit settings

- By key-operated lock:
- Main contacts open
- Isolated position (2 different locks possible)

- By cable interlocking, for supply inversion


(see next page)

26
MECHANICAL ACCESSORIES SUPPLY INVERTERS

TECHNICAL PART
The DMX-E devices can be equipped with an The cable mechanical interlock is used to interlock
operation counter (Cat.No 26324). Its counts breakers according to the desired control scheme.
the total number of operations (cycles). It can interlock 2 or 3 devices, which may not be of
the same type (3P, 4P, fixed, draw-out, mixed) in a
For draw-out breakers or switches, a mis- vertical or horizontal configuration.
insertion device can be used to prevent the The interlock units are mounted on the right-hand
insertion of a draw-out breaker into an side of the device.
incompatible base. See possible mounting arrangement p.28

Fixed to draw-out conversion

A fixed breaker can easily be converted into a


draw-out breaker. It just requires an empty base
and a set of rear terminals.

FOR MORE INFORMATION


See the on-line catalogue:
instructions, technical data sheets, etc.

Base for draw-out device

27
DMX-E
air circuit breakers (continued)

Possible mounting arrangements

Association possible
Association impossible

Schematic diagram
Type of Interlock Typical circuit Interlocks possible
Cable length : 2 meters, min. Radius at cable bend : 70 mm

G A B
Two Incomers O O
A B I O
O I

G A B C
O O O
Three Incomers A B C I O O
O I O
O O I

A B C
G
O O O
Two Incomers I O O
One Standby A B C
O I O
I I O
O O I

A B C
O O O
I O O
Two Incomers O I O
One Bus Coupler A C
I O I
B
O I I
I I O
I O I

O - Breaker Open I - Breaker Closed

28
CONNECTION

TECHNICAL PART
Correctly sized connections are essential for the with adjustable rear terminals (except 2000 and
reliability of installations and in particular for high 2500 A). Terminals accept aluminium cables and
power equipment. DMX-E devices and switches bars. It is recommended to place the first busbar
have generously sized connection plates. Fixed support at a maximum distance of 100 mm from
devices are delivered with fixed rear horizontal the back of the breaker.
connections while draw-out types are delivered

■ Connection
Fixed version 3 P/4 P Draw-out version rear terminals 3 P/4 P
A B Ø 12.9 Ø 12.9 A B
Ø 12.9 Ø 12.9
17.5 17.5
40
15

65

19
C

15

C
D
41

F E 38 38

D
Holes (on both sides) G
for Earthing connections 83.5 16 83.5 16 F E
by M10
G

Up to 1600 A From 2000 to 2500 A From 3200 to 4000 A


Fixed Draw-out Fixed Draw-out Fixed Draw-out
3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P
A 65 65 65 65 98 98 98 98 65 65 65 65
B 40 40 27 27 28 28 27 27 40 40 27 27
C 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 105
D 122 122 129 129 122 122 129 129 122 122 129 129
E 73.5 73.5 73.5 73.5 90 90 90 90 73.5 73.5 73.5 73.5
F 100 100 100 100 133.3 133.3 133.3 133.3 100 100 100 100
G 347 447 347 447 447 581 447 581 647 847 647 847

Connections: a few recommendations!


Connections provide the electrical connection of equipment and are also responsible for a considerable
proportion of their heat dissipation. Connections must never be under-sized. Plates or terminals must be
used over a maximum area. Heat dissipation is encouraged by arranging the bars vertically. If an uneven
number of bars is connected, place the higher number of bars on the upper part of the terminal. Avoid bars
running side by side: this causes poor heat dissipation and vibrations. Place spacers between the bars to
maintain a distance between them which is at least equivalent to their thickness.

29
DMX-E
air circuit breakers (continued)

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

››› DMX-E breakers


According to IEC 60947-2
DMX-E 55 DMX-E 65 DMX-E 80 DMX-E 100
800 800 2000 2000 3200 2000
1600 1600 2500 2500 4000 4000

800 800 2000 2000 3200 2000


Rated current at 40 °C A In
1600 1600 2500 2500 4000 4000
Neutral protection 0/50/100% 0/50/100% 0/50/100% 0/50/100% 0/50/100% 0/50/100%
Rated insulation voltage V Ui 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
Rated impulse withstand voltage kV Uimp 12 12 12 12 12 12
Rated operational voltage V Ue 690 690 690 690 690 690

Ultimate 400/415 VA 50/60 Hz 55 65 65 80 80 100


breaking 500/550 VA 50/60 Hz kA Icu 50 55 55 70 65 85
capacity 660/690 VA 50/60 Hz 42 50 50 55 55 75

Service 400/415 VA 50/60 Hz


breaking 500/550 VA 50/60 Hz Ics 100% Icu 100% Icu 100% Icu 100% Icu 100% Icu 100% Icu
capacity 660/690 VA 50/60 Hz
Short 0.5 s 55 65 65 80 80 100
time
1s kA Icw 50 50 55 65 65 70
withstand
current 3s 23 26 35 35 42 50
Short 400/415 VA 50/60 Hz 121 143 143 176 176 220
circuit
500/550 VA 50/60 Hz kA Icm 105 121 121 154 154 187
making
capacity 660/690 VA 50/60 Hz 88 105 105 121 121 165
Opening time ms 40
Closing time ms 60
Suitable for isolation yes yes yes yes yes yes
Width 3P mm 347 347 447 447 647 647
Fixed Width 4P mm 447 447 581 581 847 847
device Depth mm 335
Height mm 430
Dim.
Width 3P mm 347 347 447 447 647 647
Draw-out Width 4P mm 447 447 581 581 847 847
device Depth mm 421
Height mm 433
Frame size I I II II III III

30
TECHNICAL PART
››› DMX-EI isolating switches
According IEC 60947-3
DMX-EI
400 2000 3200
1600 2500 4000

400 2000 3200


Rated current at 40° C A In
1600 2500 4000
Rated insulation voltage V Ui 1000 1000 1000
Rated impulse withstand voltage kV Uimp 12 12 12
Rated operational voltage V Ue 690 690 690
Short 0,5 s 143 176 220
time
1s kA Icm 121 154 187
withstand
current 3s 105 121 165
Short 400/415 VA 50/60 Hz 143 176 220
circuit
500/550 VA 50/60 Hz kA Icm 121 154 187
making
capacity 660/690 VA 50/60 Hz 105 121 165
Suitable for isolation yes yes yes
Width 3P mm 347 447 647
Fixed Width 4P mm 447 581 847
device Depth mm 335
Height mm 430
Dim.
Width 3P mm 347 447 647
Draw-out Width 4P mm 447 581 847
device Depth mm 421
Height mm 433
Frame size I II III

31
DMX-E
air circuit breakers (continued)

DIMENSIONS
››› DMX-E
up to 1 600 A

■ Dimensions
Fixed version
3P 4P

7 7
430

430

A A A A

335 6 Panel 435 6 Panel


112 25 Door 112 25 Door
347 447
355 355

Draw-out version
3P 4P

7 7
Panel Panel
Door Door
433

433

16 A
16
isolated isolated
25.5 35 25.5 35
A A test A
49.5 250 47.5 250 49.5 100
A
250 47.5 250 test
347 62.4 280 62.4 280
447
421 421

A Fixing holes suitable for M10

32
DIMENSIONS

TECHNICAL PART
››› DMX-E
up to 2 000 to 2 500 A

■ Dimensions
Fixed version
3P 4P

7 7
430

430

A A A A

435 6 Panel Panel


112 25 569 6
Door 112 25 Door
447 581
355 355

Draw-out version
3P 4P

7 7
Panel Panel
Door Door
433

433

A
16 16
A
isolated isolated
25.5 35 25.5 35
A A test
49.5 100 250 47.5 250 A A test
49.5 100 250 47.5 250
447 62.4 280 62.4 280
581
421 421

A Fixing holes suitable for M10

33
DMX-E
air circuit breakers (continued)

DIMENSIONS
››› DMX-E
up to 3 200 to 4 000 A

■ Dimensions
Fixed version
3P 4P
7 7
430
430

A A A A

635 6 Panel 835 6 Panel


112 25 Door 112 25 Door
647 847
355 355

Draw-out version
3P 4P
433
433

A
A

A A
A A 49.5 200 100 250 47.5
49.5 100 250 47.5
847
647

7 7
Panel Panel
Door Door

16 16
isolated isolated

25.5 35 25.5 35
A test
A test 5 250
5 250
62.4 280
62.4 280
421
421

A Fixing holes suitable for M10

34
OP4
OP3
OP2
OP1
Main Circuit

N1, N2
AS+, AS-
LOAD

Ref. No.
N R Y B

:
:
:
:
:
:
N1
N2 OP1

1
/ 2.5GT
Protection&

MP2GT
Control Unit OP4 OP2

Auxiliary Supply
OP3

Common Terminal

External Neutral CT
Earth Fault Indication
AS- AS+

Overload Fault Indication


Electric EC2 EC1

2
EC
Charging Device
12 .4 .3 11

AX
14 .2 .1 13
Auxiliary Contacts

3
22 .4 .3 21

››› MP2GT / 2.5GT P&C UNIT


2NO + 2NC
23

AX
24 .2 .1
D2 D1

Short-Circuit / Instantaneous Fault Indication


4
U/V Release

UR
32 .4 .3 31
33

AX
34 .2 .1
Auxiliary Contacts

3
42 .4 .3 41
2NO + 2NC
44 43

AX
.2 .1
A2 A1

5
Closing Release
C2 C1

6
Shunt Release C2 .2 .1 C1
C

CR SR SRW
104

7
RTC
Ready to Close 101
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

102
114
111

URM
U/V Fault Signal

4m
112
124
121

SRM
Shunt trip signal

6m
122
134

CFM
Common Fault 131
132

1m
SER

PI
CMN TST
Electrical Position

8e
ISO
204

CS1
201
202
214

CS2
211
212
304

CT1
301
302
Additional Electrical

9
Position Indication 314
311 CT2 312
404
CI1

401
402
414
CI2

411
412

35
TECHNICAL PART
DPX
moulded
case circuit
breakers

The DPX range is


characterised by its innovative
design and excellent
performance.
DPXs offer optimum solutions
for the protection needs of
commercial and industrial
installations.

Find the complete offer


on page 176

36
THE RANGE

TECHNICAL PART
Circuit breakers are available in thermal
magnetic and electronic versions with nominal
currents from 16 to 1600 A and breaking
capacities from 16 to 100 kA. The main
characteristics of DPX circuit breakers are their
optimised dimensions, their ease of installation,
use and accessorisation, and their undisputed
reliability.

Thermal magnetic DPXs


Circuit breakers equipped with thermal magnetic
releases are used to set the thermal intervention
DPX 125
thresholds for protection against overloads and
the magnetic intervention thresholds for protection
against short-circuits.
The magnetic threshold setting option is available
on all devices from the DPX 250 upwards. This
threshold is fixed on equipment for DIN rail
mounting (DPX 125, DPX 160 and DPX 250 ER).
Thermal magnetic DPXs are available from 16 to
1250 A with breaking capacities from 16 to 100 kA.

DPX: non-standard products


Legrand make special products on request
based on the DPX standard range, in particular:
DPX 250 ER
- Circuit-breakers for power distribution with side-mounted add-on earth lockage module
companies: designed to the most stringent
specifications to ensure that the conditions
of use are met
- Magnetic-only circuit-breakers
- 2-pole circuit-breakers (3-pole case) FOR MORE INFORMATION
- Ambient temperature higher or lower
than 40°C For all other requests, please consult
- Etc your Legrand sales office

37
DPX
moulded case circuit breakers (continued)

THE RANGE (continued)


Electronic DPXs
Electronic releases are available
DPXs equipped with microprocessor-based
in 3 versions:
electronic releases offer the option, depending on the
- S1: adjustment of Ir and Im
version, of setting precisely both the time and
- S2: adjustment of Ir, Tr, Im and Tm
current intervention thresholds for overloads,
- Sg: adjustment of Ir, Tr, Im Tm, Ig and Tg
short-circuits and also for ground faults.
Electronic DPXs are available from 40 to 1600 A
with breaking capacities from 36 to 100 kA.

DPX-H 630 - Electronic release Sg

Identification of the type


Electrical performance
- Yellow DPX-H
and standard references

Characteristics Marker holders


- Cat No.
- Breaking capacity
- Nominal current (rating)
- Standard Indicator lamps
- Green: normal operation
Adjustment of the neutral - Continuous red: I ≤ 0,9 Ir
(0-0.5-1) - Flashing red: I ≥ 1,05 Ir

Trip indicator
lamps
Test socket

Test button Sealing of settings


Setting the releases

38
TECHNICAL PART
DPX 250 DPX 630 DPX 1600
electronic release electronic release electronic 1

Depending on the model, DPX electronic devices provide additional innovative functions.
- Thermal memory: in the context of “long delay” protection, the release memorises the image of the
temperature rise produced by an overload. This “thermal memory” is refreshed regularly if no other
over-load occurs. However, if there are successive overloads, the effects are cumulative and the operating
time of the device will be proportionally reduced. Protection of the cable is thus maintained.
- Setting the neutral current on the front panel (0%, 50%, 100% of the phase current).
- Logical discrimination: a special link between two devices can be used to assign an additional 50 ms delay
to the device installed upstream in order to give the downstream device time to break the circuit.
- Load-shedding function: when a device is crossed by a current greater than 105% of Ir, it is possible, using
the output contacts, to shed the non-priority circuits.
The load shedding information is cancelled when the device load returns to less than 85% of Ir.
- Signalling the device load via LEDs on the front panel
(green: normal ; red continuous: I = 0.9 × Ir ; red flashing: I = 1.05 × Ir).
- Connector on front panel for wiring the electronic test device Cat. No. 261 99.
- Self-protection if there is a microprocessor problem.
- Device for detection of significant earth faults, with adjustment of the current Ig from 0.2 to 1 × In,
and the time Tg from 0.1 to 1 second.

39
DPX
moulded case circuit breakers (continued)

CHARACTERISTICS

Type of case DPX 125 DPX 125 DPX 160 DPX 250 ER
DPX E DPX E DPX DPX DPX DPX DPX DPX DPX DPX
Type of MCCB
16 kA 16 kA 25 kA 36 kA 25 kA 36 kA 50 kA 25 kA 36 kA 50 kA
Number of poles 1P 3P - 3P + 5N - 4P 3P - 3P + 5N - 4P 3P - 3P + 5N - 4P
Nominal rating (A) 16-125 16-125 63-160 40-60 25-250
Electrical characteristics conforming to CEI 60947-2
Nominal frequency 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Rated operating voltage Ue (V) 230 VA 500 VA - 250 V= 500 VA - 250 V= 500 VA - 250 V=
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 290 VA 500 VA 500 VA 500 VA
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 6 6 6 6
Category of use A A A A
Ultimate breaking capacity Icu (kA) 230 VA 16 22 35 40 40 50 65 40 50 65
400 VA 16 25 36 25 36 50 25 36 50
440 VA 10 18 20 20 25 30 20 25 30
480/500 VA 8 12 14 10 12 15 10 12 15
600 VA
690 VA
250 V= 16 25 30 25 36 45 25 36 45
Service breaking capacity Ics (% Icu) 50 100 50 75 100 75 50 100 75 50
Rating closing capacity on short circuit Icm (400 V) 32 32 52.5 75.6 52.5 75.6 105 52.5 75.6 105
Rating short-time withstand current Icw (kA)
Endurance (o.c. cycle) mechanical 8500 7000 7000 7000
electrical 8500 1000 1000 1000
Isolation capability • •
External accessories
Earth leakage modules underneath • • •
side by side • • •
Remote control • •
Fixed type • • • •
Plug-in type • • •
Draw-out type
Rotary handle • • •
Supply inverter • •
Dimension and weight
Dimensions L x H x D (mm) 1-pole 25x120x74
3-pole 75.6 x 120 x 74 90 x 150 x74 90 x 76 x 74
4-pole 101 x 120 x 74 120 x 150 x 74 120 x 176 x 74
Weight (kg) 3-pole 1 1.2 1.6
4-pole 1.2 1.6 2.1

40
TECHNICAL PART
DPX 250 ELEC. DPX 250 DPX 630 ELEC. DPX 630 DPX 1250 DPX 1600 ELEC.
DPX DPX H DPX L DPX DPX H DPX L DPX DPX H DPX L DPX DPX H DPX L DPX DPX H DPX L DPX DPX H
36 kA 36 kA 36 kA 50 kA 50 kA
3P - 4P 3P - 3P + 5N - 4P 3P - 4P 3P - 3P + 5N - 4P 3P - 4P 3P - 4P
40-250 40-250 200-630 400-630 200-630 320-630 800-1250 800-1600

50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz


690 VA 690 VA - 250 V= 690 VA 690 VA - 250 V= 690 VA - 250 V= 690 VA
690 VA 690 VA 690 VA 690 VA 690 VA
8 8 8 8 8
A A A (160-400 A) - B (630 A) A B
60 100 170 60 100 170 60 100 170 60 100 170 80 100 170 80 100
36 70 100 36 70 100 36 70 100 36 70 100 50 70 100 50 70
30 60 70 30 60 70 30 60 70 30 60 70 45 65 80 45 65
25 40 45 25 40 45 25 40 45 25 40 45 35 45 55 35 45
20 25 28 20 25 28 20 25 28 20 25 28 25 35 40 25 35
16 20 22 16 20 22 16 20 22 16 20 22 25 25 30 20 25
36 40 40 36 40 40 50 50 50
100 75 50 100 75 50 100 75 50 100 75 50 100 75 50 100 75
75.6 154 220 75.6 154 220 75.6 154 220 75.6 154 220 105 154 220 105 154
3 5 15 ≤ 1250 < 20
7000 7000 4000 4000
1000 1000 1000
• •

• • • •

• • • • • •
• • • • • •
• • • •
• • • • • •
• • • • • •
• • • • • •

105 x 200 x 105 105 x 200 x 105 140 x 260 x 105 140 x 260 x 105 210 x 320 x 140 210 x 320 x 140
140 x 200 x 105 140 x 200 x 105 183 x 260 x 105 140 x 260 x 105 280 x 320 x 140 280 x 320 x 140
2.5 2.5 5.3 ≤ 400 < 5.8 5.5 18 18
3.7 3.7 6.8 ≤ 400 < 7.4 6.4 23.4 23.4

41
DPX
moulded case circuit breakers (continued)

TRIPPING CURVES

Tripping curve for a DPX Tripping curve for a DPX electronic trip
thermal-magnetic trip adjustable Ir, Im, Tr and Tm (S2)

10 000 10000

t (s) t (s)
Thermal realease zone Tr = 30 s 20 %
1 000 1000
when cold Tr = 20 s 20 %
Tr = 10 s 20 %

100 Tr = 5 s 20 %
100

10 Thermal realease zone 10


when hot (in steady state)

1 I2t = K
1
Im
Adjustable magnetic In: 1 600 A
realease zone
In: 1 250 A
0.1
Im 0.1 In: 630 A
Tm

0.01
0.01
If

0.001
1 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 50 100 0.001
I/Ir 0.2 1 2 3 4 5 10 5 7 10 30 70
I/Ir I/In

I: actual current
Ir: long delay protection against overloads
I: actual current (adjustable: Ir = x In, 0.4 to 1 x In)
Ir: thermal overload protection Tr: long delay protection operation time
(Ir setting = x In) (adjustment: 5 to 30 s), values given at 6 x Ir
Im: magnetic protection against short-circuits: Im: short delay protection against short-circuits
(Im setting = x In) (adjustable: Im = x Ir, 1.5 to 10 x Ir in the example)
Tm: short delay protection operation time
Since the curve abscissa expresses the I/Ir ratio, (adjustable: 0 to 0.3 s)
modifying the Ir setting does not change I2t constant (adjustment via Tm)
the graphic representation of thermal see discrimination chapter p. 90
tripping. Conversely, the magnetic setting can be If: fixed threshold instantaneous protection
read directly (3.5 to 10 in this example). (5 to 20 kA depending on the model)

42
TECHNICAL PART
››› Example of reading and adjusting a tripping curve
Rated current Ib = 500 A
Ik3 max = 25 kA at the circuit breaker point of installation
—> Electronic DPX 630, rating 630 A (Cat. No. 256 03/07)
—> Long delay adjustment (overloads) Ir = 0.8 x In, ie. Ir = 504 A

10 000

t (s)

1 000

100

10

In: 630 A
0,1 In: 400 A
In: 250 A
In: 160 A
0,01
If

0.001
0.2 1 2 3 4 5 10 5 7 10 30 70
I/Ir I/In

Scenario 1: high Ik min. end of line Scenario 2: low Ik min. end of line
Ik minimum (at end of line) = 20 kA Ik minimum (at end of line) = 4 kA
—> short delay adjustment (short-circuit) to its maxi- —> short delay adjustment (short-circuit)
mum value ie. Im = 10 × Ir, ie. Im = 5040 A Im = 5 × Ir, ie. 2520 A
Reading the curves: Reading the curves:
If I < 504 A —> no tripping If I < 504 A —> no tripping
If 504 < I < 5 kA —> tripping between 1 and 200 s (long If 504 < I < 2520 A —> tripping between 10 and 200 s
delay protection) (long delay protection)
If I > 5 kA —> tripping in 0.01 s If 2520 A < I < 5 kA —> tripping < 0.1 s
(instantaneous protection at fixed threshold) (short delay protection)
If I > 5 kA —> tripping 0.01 s
—> (instantaneous protection at fixed threshold)

43
DPX
moulded case circuit breakers (continued)

CONNECTION ACCESSORIES

Connecting the DPX

Version Connection DPX 125 DPX 160 DPX 250 ER DPX 250 DPX 630 DPX 1250/1600

Front terminals Mounted Mounted Mounted Mounted


Cage terminals Mounted Mounted • • • •
High capacity cage terminals • •
Front terminals extended • • • •
Fixed Spreaders • • •
Threaded rear terminals • • • • •
Flat rear terminals • •
Short flat rear terminals •
Long flat rear terminals •
Front terminals • • • • •
Plug-in Threaded rear terminals • • • • •
Flat rear terminals • •
Front terminals • • •
Draw-out
Threaded rear terminals • • •

Reversible supply
All DPXs can be supplied by either the upper
or lower terminals without any derating of
their performance.

44
Mounting, control and connection accessories

TECHNICAL PART
Connection terminals
and accessories Terminal shields Spreaders

Remote control

Rotary handle

Base for plug-in version


and “débro-lift” mechanism
for draw-out version

Rear terminals Flat rear terminals Earth leakage modules

45
DPX
moulded case circuit breakers (continued)

ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
Current shunt trip Auxiliary contacts and alarm contacts
Used to open the device remotely. These can be used to transfer remotely
It is always connected in series with an NO control information about the circuit breaker status.
type contact. Auxiliary contacts indicate whether the device is
open or closed, whereas alarm contacts indicate
Undervoltage release that the device is in the “tripped” position following
intervention by the protection unit, a shunt trip, an
With or without a time delay, this causes the
undervoltage release, by the residual current
device to open during a significant reduction in
device or following unplugging.
or absence of control voltage.
Undervoltage releases can be equipped with a
These contacts are mounted on the right of the
time-lag module to avoid false tripping of the
control switch handle under the device cover.
device when the release power supply voltage is
Electrical auxiliaries are mounted on the front
not stable.
panel of the device, in reserved insulated
compartments, without affecting the internal
The releases are mounted to the left of the control
mechanism. The cables exit either via the device
switch handle under the device cover.
side or rear opening. For plug-in and draw-out
versions, the auxiliaries are connected on special
connectors (Cat. No. 098 19/6 contacts and
263 99/8 contacts).

Electrical controls
Used to control circuit breaker making and
breaking remotely. They are installed on the side
of DIN rail mounting devices or on the front for
the rest of the DPX range. Electrical controls can
be equipped with locking devices.

46
Mounting auxiliaries on DPX

TECHNICAL PART
Auxiliary contact
or fault signal

Trips

Maximum number of auxiliaries per DPX

Device Auxiliary contact Fault signal Trip

DPX 125 1 1 1

DPX 160 1 1 1

DPX 250 ER 1 1 1

DPX 250 2 1 1

DPX 630 2 2 1

DPX 1600 3 1 1

47
DPX
moulded case circuit breakers (continued)

PLUG-IN AND DRAW-OUT VERSIONS


With the advantage of both plug-in and draw-out versions, DPXs - notwithstanding their ability to “make safe”
installations and devices - represent a significant development in the actual functions of this type of device.

DPX250
plug-in version,
mounted on its base
DPX 1600
with rear terminals
draw-out

DPX mounting versions

DPX 1250
Mounting DPX 125 DPX 160 DPX 250 ER DPX 250 DPX 630 1600
+ Downstr. RCD

+ Downstr. RCD

+ Downstr. RCD

+ Downstr. RCD

+ Downstr. RCD
+ Side RCD

+ Side RCD

+ Side RCD
On its own

On its own

On its own

On its own

On its own

On its own

On rail • • • • • •
Front terminals • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Fixed
Rear terminals • • • • • • • • • • •
Front terminals • • • • • • • • •
Plug-in
Rear terminals • • • • • • • •
Front terminals • • • • •
Draw-out
Rear terminals • • • • •

48
Plug-in versions
Plug-in (or disconnectable) devices can be inserted Plug-in devices can, in simple situations, be used

TECHNICAL PART
or removed without powering down the relevant for isolation and making safe, but they are primarily
circuit. Connection and disconnection are only used for their interchangeability, which makes
possible when the device is open; otherwise, maintenance much easier.
disconnection causes mechanical breaking They are sometimes designated by the letter D
of the device. as “Disconnectable parts”.

MCCB Tulip contacts Mounting base

DPX 250 ER

DPX 250

DPX 630

49
DPX
moulded case circuit breakers (continued)

PLUG-IN AND DRAW-OUT VERSIONS (continued)

Draw-out versions
Draw-out devices which in addition to the advantages
of plug-in devices (interchangeability and visible
break isolation) can be used, due to the associated
“debro-lift“ mechanism, to control connection and “Debro-lift” mechanism
disconnection, to enable tests and measurements
on the auxiliairy circuits while isolating the main Very simple to install (two screws), the “debro-lift”
circuits, to display the status of these circuits, and mechanism is fixed on the support bases common
finally by means of different systems (padlocks, to the devices.
locks, etc) to lock the device for padlocking The connection/disconnection operation is then
operations. performed mechanically by a crank mechanism.
Draw-out devices can be designated by the letter W
The mechanism determines three positions
as “Withdrawable parts”.
identified by different coloured indicators:
• “connected”, main circuits and auxiliary
Tulip Mounting base circuits connected, red indicator
MCCB • “test”, main circuits isolated and auxiliary
contacts + “débro-lift” circuits connected, yellow indicator
• “drawn-out”, main circuits and auxiliary
circuits isolated, green indicator

Base and
“debro-lift”
DPX 630 mechanism
for DPX 630

Indicator
signalling
the different
positions of
DPX 1600 the mechanism

50
CONNECTION CAPACITIES

TECHNICAL PART
Numerous accessories are available to meet all the various connection requirements.
In addition to direct connection on a plate, they include terminals, distribution terminals,
connection extension rods, spreader strips, rear terminals with screws or flat connectors, etc.
The tables below give the connection capacities for the various accessories selected.

DPX 125 Maximum capacities for each pole


Connection Busbars Conductors Copper terminals Aluminium terminals
standard compact standard compact

Cross-section
(mm2)
Width S - Ø S - Ø S - Ø S - Ø
Mode (mm) rigid flexible (mm2 - mm) (mm2 - mm) (mm2 - mm) (mm2 - mm)

Cage terminals 12 70 70
(included with DPX)

048 67
Distribution 6 x 35 6 x 25
terminal

263 00/01
Rear terminals 15 95-8 120-8
with screws

DPX 160 Maximum capacities for each pole


Connection Busbars Conductors Copper terminals Aluminium terminals
standard compact standard compact

Cross-section
(mm2)
Width S - Ø S - Ø S - Ø S - Ø
Mode (mm) rigid flexible (mm2 - mm) (mm2 - mm) (mm2 - mm) (mm2 - mm)

Direct 18 50-6 50-8


on plate

262 18 13 95 70
Cage terminal
262 17
Connection 20 70-10 185-10
extension rod
262 19
Large-capacity 120 95
terminal

048 67
Distribution 6 x 35 6 x 25
terminal

263 00/01
Rear terminals 18 120-8 185-10 120-10
with screws

51
DPX
moulded case circuit breakers (continued)

CONNECTION CAPACITIES (continued)

DPX 250 ER Maximum capacities for each pole


Connection Busbars Conductors Copper terminals Aluminium terminals
standard compact standard compact

Cross-section
(mm2)
Width S - Ø S - Ø S - Ø S - Ø
Mode (mm) rigid flexible (mm2 - mm) (mm2 - mm) (mm2 - mm) (mm2 - mm)

20 70-8 120-10
Direct
on plate

18 185 150
262 88
Cage terminal

32 185-12 300-10 240-12 300-10

262 90/91
Spreaders

25 120-10 185-10 150-12 185-10


262 31
Adaptors

185-12 240-12
265 10/11
Rear terminals with
screws

95-8 185-10 95-12 185-10


Plug-in version
Front terminals

Rear terminals with screws


Draw-out
version
Rear terminals

52
TECHNICAL PART
DPX 250 Maximum capacities for each pole
Connection Busbars Conductors Copper terminals Aluminium terminals
standard compact standard compact

Cross-section
(mm2)
Mode Width S - Ø S - Ø S - Ø S - Ø
(mm) rigid flexible (mm2 - mm) (mm2 - mm) (mm2 - mm) (mm2 - mm)

25 95-8 185-10 185-10


Direct
on plate

262 35
18 185 150
Cage terminal

32 185-12 300-10 240-12 300-10


262 33/34
Spreaders

Ig 25 120-10 185-10 150-12 185-10


262 31
Adaptors

262 32
25 150-12 300-10 240-12 300-10
Connection
extension rod

263 31/32 25 185-12 240-12


Rear terminals with
screws

265 57/28 25 95-10 185-10 150-12 185-10


Rear terminals with flat
connectors

Plug-in version 20 95-10 185-10 95-12 185-10


Front terminals

20 2 x 95-8 2 x 185-10 2 x 185-10


XL-Part base
Plug-in version

Plug-in and
draw-out version Supplied with rear terminals with screws
Rear terminals

53
DPX
moulded case circuit breakers (continued)

CONNECTION CAPACITIES (continued)

DPX 630 Maximum capacities for each pole


Connection Busbars Conductors Copper terminals Aluminium terminals
standard compact standard compact

Cross-section
(mm2)
Width S - Ø S - Ø S - Ø S - Ø
Mode (mm) rigid flexible (mm2 - mm) (mm2 - mm) (mm2 - mm) (mm2 - mm)

32 150-12 300-10 240-12 300-10


Direct on
plate

262 50 25 300 240


Cage terminal

262 51
Terminal for 2 x 240 2 x 185
2 conductors

50 2 x 185-12 2 x 300-10 2 x 240-16 2 x 300-10


262 48/49
Spreaders

262 46
Adaptors
32 2 x 150-12 2 x 300-10 2 x 240-12 2 x 300-10
400A

262 47 32 2 x 150-12 2 x 300-10 2 x 240-12 2 x 300-10


Connection
extension rod

263 50/51 32 2 x 300-16 2 x 300-16


Rear terminals with
screws

263 52/53 40 2 x 185-12 2 x 300-10 2 x 240-12 2 x 300-10


Rear terminals
with flat connectors

Plug-in or
25 150-12 300-10 240-12 300-10
draw-out version
Front terminals

25 1 x 150-12 2 x 300-10 2 x 240-12 2 x 300-10


XL-Part base
Plug-in version

Plug-in or Supplied with rear terminals with flat connectors or screws


draw-out version
Rear terminals

54
TECHNICAL PART
DPX 1600 Maximum capacities for each pole
Connection Busbars Conductors Copper terminals Aluminium terminals
standard compact standard compact

Cross-section
(mm2)
Width S - Ø S - Ø S - Ø S - Ø
Mode (mm) rigid flexible (mm2 - mm) (mm2 - mm) (mm2 - mm) (mm2 - mm)

50 300-14 300-16
Direct on
plate

262 69
2 x 240 2 x 185
Terminal for
2 conductors

262 70
4 x 240 4 x 185
Terminal for
4 conductors

80 4 x 300-14 4 x 300-16 4 x 300-14


262 73/74
Spreaders

262 67 ( 1250 A) 50 2 x 300-14 2 x 300-16 2 x 300-14


262 68
Connection extension rod

50 2 x 300-14 2 x 300-16 2 x 300-14


263 80/82
Short rear terminals

50 3 x 300-14 3 x 300-16 3 x 300-14


263 81/83
Long rear terminals

4 x 120-12
50 4 x 185-10 2 x 300-14 4 x 150-10
2 x 300-14
Draw-out
version
Front terminals

50 2 x 185-12 2 x 240-12

Draw-out
version
Rear terminals

55
DPX
moulded case circuit breakers (continued)

SUPPLY INVERTERS
Supply inverters can be
created with DPX 160,
DPX 250, DPX 630 and
DPX 1600 devices,
using breakers or
switches in fixed or
draw-out versions,
available in 3 different
versions:
- Manual: the mounting plate, equipped with a
mechanical interlock device, prevents the
simultaneous closing of the two devices it
supports. A device can only close if the other
device is open.
- Remote control: the devices are equipped
with motor-driven control and their operation
can therefore be controlled remotely.
- Automatic: an electronic control unit
(230 VA or 24 V=) drives the inverter.

56
SWITCH VERSIONS

TECHNICAL PART
Trip-free switches are circuit-breakers without DPX-I DPX-I DPX-I DPX-I DPX-I DPX-I
125 160 250 ER 250 630 1 600
protection release. Rated
50/60 Hz 500 500 500 690 690 690
Their size and overall dimensions are the same operating
voltage
and they can be equipped with all internal and Ue (V)
dc 250 250 250 250 250 250

external accessories and all remote control Rated


devices. insulation 500 500 500 690 690 690

The DPX-I can be opened via shunt releases or


voltage Ui (V ±)
undervoltage releases and can be fitted with earth Rated impulse
withstand voltage 6 6 6 8 8 8
leakage modules. Uimp (kV)
These devices conform to standard IEC 60947-3,
Rated closing
category of use AC 23 A capacity
on 400 V 3 3.6 4.3 4.3 13 40
short-circuit
Icm (kA)

The same devices and the same accessories Short-time


resistive
1,7 2,1 3 3 7,6 20
as for circuit-breakers current
Icw (kA)
t=1s

Endurance
(o.c cycle)
mechanical 8 500 7 000 7 000 7 000 4 000 2 500

electrical 1 500 1 000 1000 1 000 1 000 500

Conventional
125 160 250 250 630 1600
thermal current (A)
125 160 250
AC 23 A (690 V±) 250 630 1600
(500 V) (500 V) (500 V)

125 160 250 250 630 -


DC 23 A (250 V±)

Other switch ranges


See Isolation chapter p.131

57
DPX
moulded case circuit breakers (continued)

RESIDUAL CURRENT VERSIONS


All DPX circuit-breakers up to 630 A can be fitted General characteristics
with earth leakage modules without modifying
- Earth leakage module with electronic release
their technical characteristics and with the same
- Type A
options for accessories.
- Time delay and sensitivity can be adjusted:
- I∆n = 30 mA - 300 mA - 1 A - 3 A
Mounting - t = instantaneous - 0.3 s - 1 s - 3 s
There are two versions of the earth leakage - If the sensitivity is set to 30 mA, the time delay
module up to 250 ER with the same technical is automatically cancelled.
characteristics but a different method of
mounting:
- mounted side by side
- mounted underneath Electronic modules
They are available in 5 ratings depending on the
rating of the circuit-breaker: power supply
- 63 A for the DPX 125 from 16 to 63 A N L1 L2 L3
- 125 A for the DPX 125 from 100 to 125 A reset isolator switch
- 160 A for the DPX 250 ER
- 250 A for the DPX 250 ER
- 250 A for the DPX 250
- 400 A for the DPX 630
- 630 A for the DPX 630
Installation of earth leakage modules is a purely electronics
mechanical task and neither device needs to be
dismantled.
If earth leakage modules are mounted on the
underneath, the electrical connection is direct. test
N L1 L2 L3
If they are mounted side by side, the conductors use
have to be connected.

This earth leakage module is adjustable


Residual current relays with separate core - in sensitivity: 0 - 0.03 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 A
- in time delay: 0 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 s.
The power supply is taken directly between the
three phases, only two of which are necessary
These add a to ensure operation of the release
residual current
function to DPX
and DMX-E circuit
breakers and
switches equipped Description of residual current devices
with trip coils. See chapter p.14

58
TECHNICAL PART
Side Side Side
Mounted Underneath Underneath Underneath
by side by side by side

Type 125 125 250 ER 250 ER 250 up to 630

Release electronic electronic electronic electronic electronic electronic

Nominal current In (A) 63-125 63-125 160-250 160-250 160-250 400 and 630

Number of poles 3-4 4 3-4 4 4-3 4-3

width 101 101 120 120 140 183

Dimensions depth 74 74 74 74 105 105


(mm)

height 120 90 150 108 108 152

Nominal voltage Ue V± (50-60 Hz) 500 500 500 500 500 500

Operating voltage V± (50-60 Hz) 230-500 230-500 230-500 230-500 230-500 230-500

Residual current I∆n (A) 0.03-0.3-1-3 0.03-0.3-1-3 0.03-0.3-1-3 0.03-0.3-1-3 0.03-0.3-1-3 0.03-0.3-1-3

Time delay threshold ∆t(s) 0- 0.3-1-3 0- 0.3-1-3 0- 0.3-1-3 0- 0.3-1-3 0- 0.3-1-3 0- 0.3-1-3

Operation in presence of DC
• • • • • •
components

DIN rail mounting • •

fixed, front terminals • • • • • •


Versions
fixed, rear terminals • • • •

supplied with DPX • •


Cable
terminals
on request • • • •

For 3-pole and 4-pole DPX › DPX 630, use RCD kits

59
DPX
moulded case circuit breakers (continued)

SPECIAL APPLICATIONS

High temperatures Rated current for DPXs depending


A circuit breaker is set to operate at on the thermal setting (Ir) as a function
of the temperature in the enclosure
In at an ambient temperature of 40 °C for
Thermal Rated 40°C 50°C 60°C 70°C
DPX circuit breakers (standard IEC 60947-2) magnetic
MCCB current Ir min. Ir max. Ir min. Ir max. Ir min. Ir max. Ir min. Ir max.
When the ambient temperature inside the enclosure 25 A 17 25 16 24 16 23 15 22
where the DPX units are installed is higher than this 40 A 28 40 27 38 26 37 25 36
value, the rated current should be reduced in order
DPX 125 63 A 44 63 42 60 40 58 38 55
to avoid false tripping.
100 A 70 100 67 96 64 92 61 88
The minimum value of the rated current 125 A 87 125 84 120 80 115 76 110
corresponds to the minimum setting of the Ir/In 25 A 16 25 14 23 13 20 12 18
trip unit (0.7 for DPX 125 - 0.64 for DPX 160 - 0.8 40 A 25 40 23 36 20 32 18 28
for DPX 400 - 0.4 for DPX 630 - 0.4 for DPX 1600). DPX 160 63 A 40 63 36 57 32 50 28 43
100 A 63 100 58 91 52 82 48 73

Plug-in and draw-out versions: 160 A 100 160 93 145 83 130 73 115

Apply a reduction coefficient of 0.85 to the 100 A 64 100 58 91 52 82 47 73


DPX 250
maximum found value of the rated current. ER 160 A 102 160 93 145 83 130 74 115
250 A 160 250 147 230 134 210 122 190
100 A 63 100 58 91 52 82 48 73
Version with earth leakage module: DPX 250 160 A 100 160 93 145 83 130 73 115
Apply a reduction coefficient of 0.9 to the maximum 250 A 160 250 147 230 130 210 115 190
found value of the rated current.
400 A 160 400 160 400 150 380
Apply a coefficient of 0.7 if the two versions are DPX 630 500 A 400 500 380 480 360 450 340 420
simultaneous. 630 A 250 630 240 599 227 567

For DPXs rated at temperatures other than 40 °C, 800 A 630 800 600 760 570 720 540 680
please contact your local sales office. DPX 1600 1000 A 800 1000 760 950 720 900 680 850
1250 A 1000 1250 950 1190 900 1125 850 1080

Electronic Rated
40°C 50°C 60°C
MCCB current

DPX 250 250 A 250 250 238


400 A 400 400 380
DPX 630
630 A 630 600 567
800 A 800 760 760
DPX 1600 1250 A 1250 1188 1125
1600 A 1600 1520 1440

60
400 Hz power supply Correction factors to be applied when setting thermal-
magnetic trip DPXs, for use at 400 Hz
The stated characteristics for the devices assume

TECHNICAL PART
a frequency of 50/60 Hz. They should be corrected Thermal setting Magnetic setting
Device Nominal
for use at 400 Hz. type rating Correction In Correction Im
factor at 400 Hz factor at 400 Hz
For DPXs, the correction factors given in the table 16 A 1 16 2 1000
opposite are to be applied when adjusting the 25 A 1 25 2 1250
thermal and the magnetic. 40 A 1 40 2 1800
DPX 125
63 A 0.95 60 2 1900
100 A 0.9 90 2 2500
125 A 0.9 112 2 2500
16 A 1 25 2 800
40 A 1 40 2 800
DPX 160 63 A 0.95 60 2 1250
100 A 0.95 95 2 2000
160 A 0,9 145 2 3200
100 A 0.95 95 2 2000
DPX 250
160 A 0.9 145 2 3200
ER
250 A 0.85 210 2 5000
40 A 1 40 2 280 to 800
63 A 0.95 60 2 440 to 1250
DPX 250 100 A 0.95 95 2 700 to 2000
160 A 0.9 145 2 1120 to 3200
250 A 0.85 210 2 1800 to 5000
DC power supply 400 A 0.8 320 1 2000 to 4000
DPX 630
Thermal-magnetic DPXs can also be used up 630 A 0.6 380 1 3200 to 6300
800 A 0.6 480 1 4000 to 8000
to an operating voltage of 500 VDC (three poles DPX 1600
1250 A 0.6 750 1 3800 to 7500
in series). Their magnetic thresholds are then
increased by 50% (see table below)

Breaking capacity Icu (kA) Protection thresholds

Rated 2 poles in series 2 poles in series 3 poles in series


Thermal Magnetic
current 110 -125 V 250 V 500 V

DPX 125-E 16-125 A 20 16 16 100% 150%


DPX 125 (25 kA) 16-125 A 30 25 25 100% 150%
DPX 125 (36 kA) 16-125 A 36 30 30 100% 150%
DPX 250 ER 25-250 A 30 25 25 100% 150%
DPX 250 ER (36 kA) 25-250 A 40 36 36 100% 150%
DPX 250 ER (50 kA) 25-250 A 50 36 36 100% 150%
DPX 250 25-250 A 40 36 36 100% 150%
DPX 250-H 25-250 A 45 90 40 100% 150%
DPX 250-L 25-250 A 50 45 45 100% 150%
DPX 630 250-630 A 40 36 36 100% 150%
DPX 630-H 250-630 A 45 40 40 100% 150%
DPX 630-L 250-630 A 50 45 45 100% 150%

61
DPX
moulded case circuit breakers (continued)

DIMENSIONS

››› DPX 125

■ Dimensions
Fixed version, front terminals Fixed version, front terminals with earth leakage
module mounted side by side
97
101 97
75.6 74 8 50.8
8 32 101 10 74 8
12 12 37.8
120
120

101

45
101

45
45

210

193

193
32.25
45

25.4 25.4 M4

25.4 Ø 4.3 or M4

Fixed version, rear terminals Fixed version, rear terminals with earth leakage
module mounted side by side

75.6 101 97 97
74 8 101 74 8
101
120

101

45
45

45
210

191

25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4


45

32.25

M8
81
10

39

M4
25.4 25.4 25.4

M8
81

M4
39
10

62
TECHNICAL PART
Terminal shields Direct rotary handle on DPX

75.5 60
25.4 8 74 48

20
11.2

A
103

80
A

80

DPX 125 170


40.2

DPX 125 + earth leakage module 260


mounted side by side 12.7 M4

20

Fixed version, front terminals with earth leakage Vari-depth handle on door
module mounted underneath(1)
35
75.5
202 97 25.4 8 74 282 max. 2/4
101 101 72 min.
74
37.8 25.4 10
11.25
62.75
103
80
120

103

45

12.7 M4

8
12.7
113.7

(1) Dimensions of 3-pole earth leakage modules are the same as 4-pole
earth leakage modules

63
DPX
moulded case circuit breakers (continued)

DIMENSIONS (continued)

››› DPX 160

■ Dimensions
Fixed version, front terminals Fixed version, front terminals with earth leakage
module mounted side by side
97
120 74 8 120 8 97
90
45 8 23 30

9
150
150
150

45
45

45

247
265

M4
30 18 max. 30 23
45
115

14 30 30 M4 23
45 74 8

Fixed version, rear terminals Fixed version, rear terminals with earth leakage
module mounted side by side
90 120 97
Y
150

150
45

45

45

X
55

247
265
241

55.5

30 30 30 30 30 74 8
161
158

45
115
95
48

30 30 30
74 8
120
97
45
M10
95
48

M4
8

64
TECHNICAL PART
Fixed version, front terminals with earth leakage Direct rotary handle on DPX
module mounted underneath(1)
60
30 M4 8 74 48
Y
240 97 35
120 120 74 8
11.25

30 M4 8
==
115
=

80

38.5
95

86
132
150

1.5 max.
15
45

X
75.5
=
60

45 30
15 135
Y

Terminal shields Vari-depth handle on door

35
30 M4 8 74 282 max. 2/4
72 min.
11.25
115
80

38.5
A

15
A
75.5
DPX 160 278
DPX 160 + earth leakage module 393
mounted side by side

(1) Dimensions of 3-pole earth leakage modules are the same as 4-pole earth leakage
modules

65
DPX
moulded case circuit breakers (continued)

DIMENSIONS (continued)

››› DPX 250 ER

■ Dimensions
Fixed version, front terminals Fixed version, front terminals with earth leakage
module mounted underneath
160 A
120 8 18 Ø max.
90 18
10 max.

30 30 30
Y
240
120 120
M4

30
==
176

145
115

95
45
38.5

176
53.5
69

1.6
30 30 30 18
20 max. 11.5
45 74
60

97
45 30
15 135

250 A

270
150
30 30 30 15
30 30 30
215.5

115

145

176
38.5

53.5

69

20 max.
30 30 30
30 30
45

66
TECHNICAL PART
Fixed version with earth leakage module mounted Direct rotary handle on DPX and vari-depth
side by side handle on door
Front terminals Rear terminals

120 8 18 Ø 18 max. 282 max.


10 max.

30 30 30 72 min.
60 35
30 M4 8 74 48 2/4

35
M4
M4
91.5

11.25
45
45

115
80
237

38.5
267
298

62.7

62.7
107.7

1.5 max.
15
45

45

75.5
52.8
67.8
83.3

1.6
10 max.

30 30 30 18 74 11.5
8
74 11.5 97
20 max. 45
97

Terminal shields

97
74
76.5
115
A

A
M4

DPX 250 ER 296


DPX 250 ER + earth leakage 418
module

67
DPX
moulded case circuit breakers (continued)

DIMENSIONS (continued)

››› DPX 250

■ Dimensions Plug-in version, front terminals


Fixed version, front terminals
105
105 140 186.5
140 105
100 20 32.5
70 17 36
35 17.5 • 4 min.

4 4 min.
33
11
173.5
200

170
94

66.5
M5
341.5
10

245.5

200
90
94

25 52.5 27
35 35 35 35 35 138.5

Ø9
Fixed version with earth leakage module mounted
35 35 35 35 35 153
side by side(1)
Front terminals Rear terminals
138.5
105 138.5 Plug-in version, rear terminals
140
11 36 105 4 min.
24 52.5
105 186.5
100 140 153
10

100 35 4 min.
94

278

281.5
308

66.5
173.5

173.5
200

90
94
10

52.5 153
35 17.5
70 27
35 35 35 35 35
M5

68
TECHNICAL PART
Draw-out version, front terminals Terminal shields
187 140 (4 P)
34 45.5 105 (3 P)
20 52.35
5

32.5
34
34 A
DPX 250 330
A
192.75

DPX 250 + earth leakage module


144.75

438
mounted side by side
124.5
99.5

66.5
155

90

X
94

449.5
353.5

313

Direct rotary handle on DPX and vari-depth


handle on door
24.75

265 max. 71.5


Ø9
93 min.
100 40 58

2.5 max.
34 50 2/4
35 35 35
25

Y
Draw-out version, rear terminals
94

Rear terminal with threaded rod


187 35 35
34 34 45.5
47.5

M12
93.5
108.75
99.5

66.5
155

173.5

35 35 35
90
94
24.75

M12
93.5

47.5

Flat rear terminals


187 35 35
34 34 45.5 19

Ø9 10
81
26
108.75
99.5

37
66.5
155

173.5
90
94

35 35 35
24.75

19 Ø9
26 10
81

37

69
DPX
moulded case circuit breakers (continued)

DIMENSIONS (continued)

››› DPX 630

■ Dimensions
Fixed version, front terminals Plug-in version, front terminals
144
140 183 105 4 min. 140 183 153
17 50 32 70 29
32 70 32 70

100 100
15 max.

100 100
260
220

94

15 max.
94

398

302

220
130
94

94
X

43.5 87 M5
43.5 43.5 43.5 43.5 43.5 27
4 min.

Ø 14
Fixed version with earth leakage module mounted 43.5 43.5 43.5 43.5 43.5 192

side by side
Front terminals Rear terminals
183 144 Plug-in version, rear terminals
70 105 4 min. 144
32 21.75 17 50
105 4 min.
140 183 192
70 153
100

100 100
94

372
412

372

220
265

130
94

94

4 min.

87 Ø 6 or
M5
43.5 43.5 43.5 27

70
TECHNICAL PART
Draw-out version, front terminals Terminal shields

130 183 34 45.5 34


29
5

34

A
A

DPX 630 390


265

398
302

265
130

155
94

X
DPX 630 + earth leakage module 542
mounted side by side
24.7

14

43.5 43.5 43.5 187 Direct rotary handle on DPX and vari-depth
Y
handle on door

Draw-out version, rear terminals 265 max. 71.5


93 min.
100 40 58
Rear terminal with threaded rod
50
45.5 34
47

34

43.5 43.5 43.5


94

M 16
103
130
220

155
94

58

2.5 max. 2/4


24.7

187

Flat rear terminal


45.5 34
34

43.5 43.5 8
130
220

155

15
94

29
124
59
24.7

187

71
DPX
moulded case circuit breakers (continued)

DIMENSIONS (continued)

››› DPX 1250 - 1600

■ Dimensions
Fixed version, front terminals
Y
Y 215
210 29
70 70 280
8
25 70 70 70 13 min.

100
169

20
25 max.
158
149

278
280

320

298
94

X X

M12

M10 M8
70 35
50 5 140
140
Y

Fixed version, rear terminals

280 (4 P) Vertical Horizontal


210 (3 P)
13 32 12.5 163 12.5
105 23 140 98 140
12
40
90
169

145.5

100
145.5

M8
68

56
273

273
118

94
320
94

X X
40

6 6
14 3 2.5 max. 3 2.5 max.
Y 238 188 238
13 32

72
TECHNICAL PART
Draw-out version, rear terminals Terminal shields
299 364
256 325 34.5
325
360

480

70 70 70 70 70
218.5
253

Direct rotary handle on DPX Vari-depth handle on door

125
49 67.5 125
62.5 265 max. 81
62.5
93 min.
66.5

66.5
125

125

2.5 max. 2/4

73
DX
modular
circuit
breakers

Legrand DX modular circuit


breakers are used to organise
distribution in rows in
complete freedom

Find the complete offer


on page 216

74
DX MODULAR CIRCUIT BREAKERS

TECHNICAL PART
18 mm 18 mm
1 module per pole up to 63 A
and 1.5 modules from 80 to 125 A

Quality and approval marks

Circuit identification
Control handle
o I - ON/red

o O - OFF/green

Characteristics

Marking of DX units

Legrand 1 3
Cat. No. 1 3 T
2 protected poles
Im : Making and
breaking capacity Breaking capacity
equal to that of
1 3 T associated MCB
In : Rated
064 66

current (nominal)
400 V 2 4
I∆m = Icn 2 4
C 10 Im = 500 A Im = 1500 A
230 V
086 29

300 mA
078 08

6000
3 2 4
40 A I∆n = 0.03 A
Mensuel I I∆n = 0.3 A 300 mA
10000 TEST Monthly TEST Mensuel
Monthly
Rated sensitivity
Limiting class Short circuit with an
associated protection I∆n : Sensitivity

DX 2-pole MCB DX 2-pole RCCB DX add-on module

75
DX
modular circuit breakers

CHARACTERISTICS OF DX UNITS

Designation DX-E 6000 /6 kA DX 6000 /10 kA

Number of poles 1P 2P 3P 4P 1P + N 1P 2P

Rated current in at 30 °C (A)


Ratings 6/10/13/16 6/10/13/16 6/10/13/16 6/10/13/16 0,5/1/2/3/4 1/2/3/4/6/10 1/2/3/4/6/10
20/25/32 20/25/32 20/25/32 20/25/32 6/8/10/13/16 16/20/25/32 16/20/25/32
40/50/63 40/50/63 40/50/63 40/50/63 20/25/32/40 40/50/63 40/50/63

Type of curve B and C B and C B and C B and C B and C B and C B and C

Nominal voltage (with standard tolerance) 230/400 V 400 V 400 V 400 V 230 V 230/400 V 400 V

Nominal frequency 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz

Operating voltage (50/60 Hz) +/- 10% 240/415 V 415 V 415 V 415 V 240 V 240/415 V 415 V

Breaking capacity with 127/230 V supply 6000 A 6000 A 6000 A 6000 A 6 000 A 6 000 A 6 000 A
Icn 50/60 Hz
acc. to EN 60898 with 230/400 V supply 6000 A 6000 A 6000 A 6000 A 6 000 A 6 000 A 6 000 A

Curve B: 25 kA
Breaking capacity Curve C:
Icu 50/60 Hz with 127/230 V supply 6 kA 6 kA 6 kA 6 kA 10 kA 10 kA
In ≤ 32 A: 25 kA
acc. to EN 60947-2
In > 32 A: 20 kA

with 230/400 V supply


6 kA 6 kA 6 kA 6 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA

Standard breaking capacity Ics acc. to


100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
EN 60947-2

Rated insulation voltage Ui


500 V 500 V 500 V 500 V 250 V 500 V 500 V
(degree of pollution 2)
Rated impulse withstand current Uimp
6 kV 6 kV 6 kV 6 kV 4 kV 6 kV 6 kV
(kV)
Endurance mechanical 20 000 20 000 20 000 20 000 20 000 20 000 20 000
(operating cycles)
electrical 10 000 10 000 10 000 10 000 10 000 10 000 10 000

Dieletric strength between 0 and 2000 m 2 500 V 2 500 V 2 500 V 2 500 V 2 500 V 2 500 V 2 500 V

Remote control - - - - - yes yes

Add-on module - - - - - - yes

Operating temperature -25°C to + 70°C -25°C to + 70°C -25°C to + 70°C -25°C to + 70°C -25°C to + 70°C -25°C to + 70°C -25°C to + 70°C

76
TECHNICAL PART
DX 6000 /10 kA DX-H 10000 /25 kA DX-D 6000 DX-L 50 kA

3P, 3P+N 3P, 3P+N


1P 1P+N 2P 1P 2P 3P and 4P 2P 4P
and 4P and 4P

1/2/3/6/10 2/3/6/10 6/10/13/16 2/3/6/10 2/3/6/10 1/2/3/6/10/ 1/2/3/6/10 1/2/3/6/10 10/16/20/25 10/16/20/25
16/20/25/32 13/16/20/25 20/25/32 13/16/20/25 13/16/20/25 13/16/20/25 16/20/25/32 16/20/25 32/40/50/63 32/40/50/63
40/50/63 32/40/50/63 40/50/63 32/40/50/63 32/40/50/63 32/40/50/63 40/50/63 32/40/50/63
80/100/125 80/100/125 80/100/125 80/100/125 80/100/125

B and C B(1) and C B and C C B(1) and C D D D C C

400 V 230/400 V 230 V 400 V 400 V 230/400 V 400 V 400 V 400 V 400 V

50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz

415 V 240/415 V 240 V 415 V 415 V 240/415 V 415 V 415 V 415 V 415 V

6 000 A 10 000 A 10 000 A 10 000 A 10 000 A 6 000 A 6 000 A 6 000 A 25 000 A 25 000 A

6 000 A 10 000 A 10 000 A 10 000 A 10 000 A 6 000 A 6 000 A 6 000 A 25 000 A 25 000 A

Curve B: 25 kA
In ≤ 40 A: 50 kA In ≤ 32 A: 25 kA In ≤ 32 A: 25 kA In ≤ 32 A: 25 kA
Curve C: In ≤ 40 A: 50 kA
25 kA 25 kA In 50/63 A: 25 kA In ≤ 63 A: 20 kA In ≤ 63 A: 20 kA In ≤ 63 A: 20 kA 70 kA 70 kA
In ≤ 32 A: 25 kA In > 40 A: 25 kA
In > 63 A: 16 kA In > 63 A: 16 kA In > 63 A: 16 kA In > 63 A: 16 kA
In > 32 A: 20 kA

In ≤ 20 A: 25 kA In ≤ 20 A: 25 kA In ≤ 20 A: 30 kA In ≤ 20 A: 25 kA
In 25 A: 20 kA In 25 A: 20 kA In 25 A: 25 kA In 25 A: 20 kA In ≤ 32 A: 15 kA In ≤ 32 A: 15 kA In ≤ 32 A: 15 kA
10 kA 50 kA 50 kA
In 32 A: 15 kA In 32/40 A: 15 kA In 32/40 A: 20 kA In 32/40 A: 15 kA In > 32 A: 10 kA In > 32 A: 10 kA In > 32 A: 10 kA
In > 32 A: 12,5 kA In > 32 A: 12,5 kA In > 40 A: 15 kA In > 40 A: 12,5 kA

100% 75% 75% 75% 75% 75% 80% 75% 75% 75%

500 V 500 V 500 V 500 V 500 V 500 V 500 V 500 V 500 V 500 V

6 kV 6 kV 6 kV 6 kV 6 kV 6 kV 6 kV 6 kV 6 kV 6 kV

20 000 20 000 20 000 20 000 20 000 20 000 20 000 20 000 20 000 20 000

10 000 10 000 10 000 10 000 10 000 10 000 10 000 10 000 10 000 10 000

2 500 V 2 500 V 2 500 V 2 500 V 2 500 V 2 500 V 2 500 V 2 500 V 2 500 V 2 500 V

yes yes - yes yes yes ≤ 63 A: yes ≤ 63 A: yes

yes - - yes yes yes yes yes yes

-25°C to + 70°C -25°C to + 70°C -25°C to + 70°C -25°C to + 70°C -25°C to + 70°C -25°C to + 70°C -25°C to + 70°C -25°C to + 70°C -25°C to + 70°C -25°C to + 70°C

77
DX
modular circuit breakers (continued)

CHARACTERISTICS OF DX UNITS (continued)

Choice of protection devices according to the neutral earthing system

As a general rule all live conductors (phase and neutral) must be protected against overloads and short-
circuits. It is however possible to do away with this requirement for the neutral conductor in certain
configurations.

Main permitted layouts according to the neutral earthing system and the type of circuit
N N N N N

Neutral
earthing
system

SN = SPH SN = SPH N not distributed SN = SPH SN < SPH SN = SPH SN < SPH SN = SPH SN < SPH

TT (1) (1)

TN-S (1) (1)

TN-C

IT (2) (2)

(1) In TT and TN systems, it is possible to use circuit breakers with unprotected neutral pole if the cross-section of the neutral
conductor is the same as that of the phase conductors. However, the neutral conductor must be protected if there is a risk
of it breaking upstream of the device and there is no residual current protection (TN system).

(2) In IT systems with a distributed neutral conductor, it is possible to use circuit breakers with unprotected neutral pole if a
residual current protection device, with a sensitivity of less than 15% of the current permissible in the neutral, is placed
upstream. This device must break all the poles, including the neutral. This situation should be limited to the supply of devices
which can withstand the full voltage (between phases) with no risk of fire.

78
Interruption of the neutral (by deliberate breaking or detection of overcurrent) must always lead to

TECHNICAL PART
breaking of all the live conductors. Single-pole breaking of the neutral creates an imbalance in the
voltages applied to single-phase devices supplied by a three-phase circuit.

When the neutral opens the R1 and R2 receivers are


powered in series by the voltage between phases
1
2
(U23: 400 V in the example)
3 U23 = UR1 + UR2
N Depending on the actual impedance of each receiver
R1 and R2, the voltage which will be applied to them
can reach destructive values.
If for example R1 is a 2 kW device and R2 a100 W
R1 R2 device, the voltage at the terminals of R1 will be 20 V
and that at the terminals of R2 will be 380 V(!)
instead of a normal voltage of 230 V.

3-phase breaking devices with neutral pole must break the neutral pole last during opening and make it
again first during closing. For this reason also it is always important to observe the N marking on
devices and not connect the neutral conductor to another pole.

79
DX
modular circuit breakers (continued)

CONNECTION OF DX UNITS

Maximum capacities for each pole


LEXIC
Control and
signalling DX 40 A DX 63 A DX 125 A DX 63A with supply busbar

Direct cage Direct cage Direct cage Direct cage Incoming terminal Incoming terminal
049 05 049 06

Mode

Connection
rigid 6 16 35 50 25 35

Cross-section 6 10 25 35 16 35
(mm2) flexible

PERFORMANCE
The DX performances vary according Rated current (A) according to the temperature for DX, DX-H
to their conditions of use. circuit breakers curves B and C and DX-D circuit breakers curve D
In (A) 0°C 10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C 50°C 60°C
Temperature
1 1.1 1.07 1.03 1 0.97 0.93 0.90
A circuit breaker is set to operate at In 2 2.2 2.1 2.06 2 1.94 1.86 1.80
in an ambient temperature of:
3 3.3 3.2 3.1 3 2.9 2.8 2.6
- 30 °C for DX circuit breakers according to
EN 60898. 6 6.6 6.4 6.18 6 6.8 5.5 5.4
10 11 10.7 10.3 10 9.7 9.3 9
16 18 17.3 16.6 16 15.4 14.7 14.1
20 22.4 21.6 20.8 20 19.2 18.4 17.6
25 28.3 27.2 26 25 24 22.7 21.7
32 36.2 34.9 33.3 32 30.7 29.1 27.8
40 46 44 42 40 38 36 34
50 57.5 55 52.5 50 47.5 45 42.5
63 73.1 69.9 66.1 63 59.8 56.1 52.9
80 96 89 86.4 80 73.6 67.2 60.8
100 119 114 108 100 92 84 76
125 148 142 135 125 115 105 95

- Reference temperature = 30°C


80
400 Hz power supply Protection of capacitor banks

TECHNICAL PART
The stated characteristics for the devices assume The rating for the protection device should be
a frequency of 50/60 Hz. determined on the basis of an actual rated current
They should be corrected for use at 400 Hz. (IB) increased by the K cœfficient.
1-module Neutral + phase DX and DX 80 A, 100 A K = 2 for Q ≤ 25 kVAR
and 125 A circuit breakers have their magnetic K = 1.8 for Q ≤ 50 kVAR
threshold increased by 35%. K = 1.7 for Q ≤ 100 kVAR
This increase is 45% for 1, 2, 3 and 4-pole DX and K = 1.5 for Q > 100 kVAR
DX-H circuit breakers from 1 to 63 A.
The other characteristics, such as the nominal IB = Q x 1000 x K
rating for operation and the thermal thresholds, Ux 3
do not change. This is the case for all ratings. Q: Capacitor bank reactive power (in kVAR)
U: Nominal voltage of 3-phase supply
DC power supply
DXs can protect lines supplied with DC, provided
they do not exceed:
- 60 V per device for DX P+N and DNX P+N
ELECTRICAL AUXILIARIES
(1 module)
- 80 V per pole for DX and DX-H. The DX range has all the necessary electrical
For voltages higher than 80 V, use multi-pole auxiliaries: auxiliary contact, fault signal, shunt
devices and place the poles in series. trips or undervoltage releases.
For DXs, the auxiliaries (3 at maximum(1)) are
Supplying power to fluorescent tubes mounted on the left-hand side of the devices.
They allow the prong-type supply busbars to pass
The rating for the protection device should be
through.
determined on the basis of an actual rated current
(IB) increased by the K cœfficient. (1)
Only 1 control auxiliary per association and 1 signalling
K = 1.8 for compensated tubes (cos ϕ ≈ 0.85)
auxiliary maximum (0.5 module or 2 auxiliaries of 1 module)
K = 3.4 for non-compensated tubes (cos ϕ ≈ 0.5)
can be mounted between the m.c.b.s. and control auxiliary.

With 230 V three-phase distribution: IB = P x K


230

With 400 V three-phase distribution: IB = P xK


400 x 3

P: Sum of powers (in W) of fluorescent fittings


depending on models (18 W, 36 W, 58 W, 2 × 36 W,
2 × 58 W, 2 × 80 W, 4 × 18 W, etc).

81
Association
of protective
devices

Back-up protection is
the technique by which
the breaking capacity of
a breaker is increased by
coordinating it with another
protection device, placed
upstream.
This coordination makes it
possible to use a protection
device with a breaking
capacity which is lower than
the maximum prospective
short-circuit current at
its installation point.

B C D E

82
BACK-UP PROTECTION

TECHNICAL PART
The breaking capacity of a protection device must
be at least equal to the maximum short-circuit Example of association
which may occur at the point at which this device
is installed.
By exception, the breaking capacity may be lower
than the maximum prospective short-circuit, as Ik max = 30 kA

long as:
- it is associated with a device upstream which has DPX 250 ER 250 A
the necessary breaking capacity at its own Breaking capacity = 50 kA
installation point
Ik max = 23 kA
- the downstream device and the trunking being
protected can withstand the power limited by the
association of the devices.
DX 40 A - C curve
Association therefore leads to substantial savings. Breaking capacity alone = 10 kA
Breaking capacity in association
The association values given in the tables on the with DPX 250 ER = 25 kA
following pages are based on laboratory tests
carried out in accordance with IEC 947-2.
In the case of single phase circuits in a 380/415
Vac system, supplied upstream by a 3-phase
circuit, it is advisable to use the association tables
for 230 Vac.

83
Association
of protective devices

BACK-UP PROTECTION (continued)

3-level association Association between distribution boards

Association applies to devices installed in the same


distribution board as well as in different boards.
A

It is therefore generally possible to benefit from


the advantages of the association between devices
located, for example, in a main distribution board
B
and in a secondary board.

A
Board n°1
An association may be created on three levels
if one of the conditions below is met.
• The upstream device A must have an adequate
breaking capacity at its installation point.
Devices B and C are associated with device A.
Simply check that the association values B + A Board n°2
and C + A have the necessary breaking capacity.
In this case, there is no need to check the association
between devices B and C. B
• The association is made between successive
devices:
- Upstream device A, which has an adequate
C
breaking capacity at its installation point,
device C is associated with device B which is
in turn associated with device A.

- Simply check that the association values C+B


and B+A have the necessary breaking capacity.
In this case, there is no need to check
the association between devices A and C.

84
TECHNICAL PART
■ In 3-phase networks (+ N) 400/415 V ■ In 3-phase networks (+ N) 230/240 V
according to IEC 60947-2 according to IEC 60947-2

Fuses upstream Fuses upstream


gG type gG type

MCBs downstream 20 to 32 A 63 to 160 A


MCBs downstream 20 to 50 A 63 to 160 A

1 to 40 A 100 100 1 to 40 A 100 100


DX DX
6 000 - 10 kA 6 000 - 10 kA

C and D curves C and D curves

50 to 125 A 100 50 to 125 A 100

2 to 40 A 100 100 2 to 40 A 100 100


DX-H DX-H
10 000 - 25 kA 10 000 - 25 kA

B and C curves B and C curves


50 to 63 A 100 50 to 63 A 100

10 to 40 A 100 100 10 to 40 A 100 100

DX-L - 50 kA DX-L - 50 kA
C curve C curve

50 to 63 A 100 50 to 63 A 100

85
Association
of protective devices (continued)

BACK-UP PROTECTION (continued)

■ In 3-phase networks + N 400/415 V according to IEC 60947-2

MCBs/MCCBs upstream

DPX/
DX-H 10 000 - 25 kA DPX-E DPX DPX
DX-L DPX-H
B and C curves 125 125 250 ER
160

MCBs downstream 2 to 32 A 40 to 125 A 10 to 32 A 40 to 63 A 16 to 125 A 16 to 125 A 25 to 160 A 63 A 100 A 160 A 250 A

1 to 20 A 25 12.5 50 25 16 25 25 25 25 25 25
25 A 25 12.5 50 25 16 25 25 25 25 25 25
32 A 12.5 25 16 25 25 25 25 25 25

DX 6 000 - 10 kA 40 A 12.5 25 16 25 25 25 25 25 25
50 A 25 16 25 20 25 25 20 20
B and C curves
63 A 16 25 15 20 15 15
80 A 20 25 20 20
100 A 20 25 20 20

125 A 25 15 15
1 to 16 A 50 25 16 25 25 25 25 25 25
20 A 50 25 16 25 20 25 25 25 25
DX-H 10 000 - 25 kA 25 A 25 16 25 15 25 25 25 25
B and C curves
32 A 25 16 25 20 25 25 25 25
DX 6 000 - 15 kA
D curve 40 A 25 16 25 20 25 25 25 25
50 A 25 16 25 15 25 25 20 20

63 A 16 25 25 25 20 15 15

10
DX-L - 50 kA 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
to
C curve
63 A

86
TECHNICAL PART
DPX/H/L DPX/H/L DPX/H/L DPX/H/L DPX/H/L
250 630 630 electronic 1 250 1 600

160 A 250 A 250 to 400 A 160 to 400 A 630 A 500 to 1 250 A 800 to 1 600 A

25 25 25 25 25 25 25

25 25 25 25 25 20 20

25 25 25 25 25 15 15

25 20 20 20 20 15 12.5

20 15 15 15 15 12.5 12.5

15 15 15 15 15 12.5

20 20 20 20 20

20 20 20 20 20

15 15 15 15 10

25 25 25 25 25 25 25

25 25 25 25 25 25 25

25 25 25 25 25 20 20

25 25 25 25 25 15 15

25 20 20 20 20 15 15

20 15 15 15 15 12.5 12.5

15 15 15 15 15 12.5 12.5

50 50 50 50 50 50 50

87
Association
of protective devices (continued)

BACK-UP PROTECTION (continued)

■ In 3-phase networks + N 230/240 V according to IEC 60947-2

MCBs/MCCBs upstream

DPX/
DX-H 10 000 - 25 kA DPX-E DPX DPX
DX-L DPX-H
B and C curves 125 125 250 ER
160

MCBs downstream 2 to 32 A 40 to 125 A 10 to 32 A 40 to 63 A 16 to 125 A 16 to 125 A 25 to 160 A 63 A 100 A 160 A 250 A

1 to 20 A 50 25 50 25 22 35 35 50 50 50 50
32 & 40 A 25 25 22 35 35 50 50 50 50
50 A 25 16 25 25 36 36 36 36
DX 6 000 - 10 kA
B and C curves 63 A 16 25 15 30 30 30
80 A 16 25 25 25 25 25
100 A 16 25 25 25 25
125 A 25 25 25
1 to 40 A 50 25 22 35 35 50 50 50 50
DX-H 10 000 - 25 kA
B and C curves 16 25
50 A 25 25 36 36 36 36
DX 6 000 - 15 kA
D curve 63 A 16 25 25 30 30 30

DX-L - 50 kA 10 to 63 A 70 70 70 70 70 70 70
C curve

TT or TN neutral earthing systems:


For a 230/400 V supply in order to determine the breaking capacity of a 2 P MCB used as L + N (230 V) downstream a 2 P or 4 P circuit
breaker use values indicated in the table for 230/240 V

88
TECHNICAL PART
DPX/H/L DPX/H/L DPX/H/L DPX/H/L
250 630 electronic 1 250 1 600

160 A 250 A 250 to 400 A 160 to 400 A 630 A 500 to 1 250 A 800 to 1 600 A

50 50 50 50 50 50 50

50 50 50 50 50 50 50

36 30 30 30 25 25 25

30 30 30 30 25 25 25

25 25 25 25 20

25 25 25 25 20

25 25 25 25 20

50 50 50 50 50 50 50

36 30 30 30 25 25 25

25 30 30 30 25 25 25

70 70 70 70 70 70

89
Association
of protective devices (continued)

DISCRIMINATION

Discrimination or selectivity is a technique which Discrimination between A and B is said to be


consists of coordinating the protection in such a “partial” in the other cases.
way that a fault on one circuit only trips the The discrimination limit (given in the following
protection placed at the head of that circuit, tables) is therefore defined. This gives the short-
thus avoiding rendering the remainder of the circuit current value below which only breaker B
installation inoperative. Discrimination improves will open and above which breaker A may open.
continuity of service and safety of the installation.
There are a number of techniques for providing
Discrimination between A and B is said to be “total” discrimination:
if it is provided up to the value of the maximum - Current discrimination, used for terminal
prospective short-circuit at the point at which B is circuits which have low short-circuits.
installed. - Time discrimination, provided by a delay on
tripping the upstream breaker.
- Logical discrimination, a variant of time
discrimination, used on electronic breakers
via a special link between the devices.

B C D E

By extension, in the tables on the following pages,


total discrimination, indicated by T, means that
there is discrimination up to the breaking capacity
of device B.

90
Since almost all faults occur during use, partial discrimination may be adequate if the discrimination

TECHNICAL PART
limit is higher than the value of the maximum short-circuit which may occur at the point of use
(or at the end of the trunking). This is referred to as “operating discrimination“.
This technique is very often adequate, more economical and less restricting in terms of implementation.

DPX 250 ER
160 A
The discrimination limit for the association
DPX 250 ER (160 A) with DX 40 A (curve C) is 6 kA.
Since the prospective ISC at the point
Ik max. : 8 kA of installation is 8 kA, the discrimination is not total.
DX 40 A However, there is discrimination at the point of use at which
the prospective short-circuit is only 3 kA.

Ik max. : 3 kA

Discrimination in current
This technique is based on the offset of the The discrimination limit is then equal to the
intensity of the tripping curves of the upstream magnetic release current ImA of the upstream
and downstream breakers. device. The discrimination is then total as long
It is checked by comparing these curves and as IkB is less than ImA.
checking that they do not overlap. It applies for the
overload zone and the short-circuit zone, and the Discrimination in current is therefore very suitable
further apart the ratings of the devices, the better for terminal circuits where short-circuits are
the discrimination. relatively weak.
In other cases, time discrimination may be used
- On overloads together with current discrimination. (see p. 92)
To have discrimination in the overload zone, the
ratio of the setting currents (Ir) must be at least 2.

- On short-circuits
To have discrimination in the short-circuit zone,
the ratio of the magnetic setting currents (Im)
must be at least 1.6.

91
Association
of protective devices (continued)

DISCRIMINATION (continued)

Current discrimination

B: downstream MCB A: upstream MCB

The discrimination
is total for IkB

Only B opens A and B open

Ir B IrA IkB I
ImB ImA
IkB : maximum short-circuit at the point at which MCB B is installed

IP (kA)

Non-limited current
When the downstream MCB B
is a limiting device, the short-circuit
Limitation curve current is limited in terms of time
of the MCB and amplitude. The discrimination
is therefore total if the limited current
IscB, which device B allows to pass,
is lower than the tripping current
of device A.

I'kB IkB ISC (kA)


IkB : prospective short-circuit at the point at which the device is installed
I'kB : short-circuit limited by device B

92
Time discrimination
Logical discrimination
This technique is based on the offset of the times

TECHNICAL PART
of the tripping curves of the breakers in series.
It is checked by comparing the curves and is used
for discrimination in the short-circuit zone. It is
also used in addition to current discrimination in
order to obtain discrimination beyond the magnetic
setting current of the upstream breaker (ImA).
50 ms
t (s)
B A

… between two electronic


DPXs via a special link
Tm

ImB ImA I (A) With the same aim of improving continuity of


service, the electronic releases also have a load
shedding function. This function is used to
The following is necessary: disconnect non-priority circuits when the
- It must be possible to set a time delay on the protected circuit has a load of more than 90%.
upstream breaker,
- The upstream breaker must be able to withstand
the short-circuit current and its effects for the
whole period of the time delay, Electronic releases with contstant I 2t setting
- The trunking through which this current passes
must be able to withstand the thermal stresses (I2t).
The use of MCCBs with electronic releases, on
The non-tripping time of the upstream device must
which a constant I2t can be set, improves the
be longer than the breaking time (including any
discrimination.
time delay) of the downstream device.
Removing the heel value of the short delay
DPX MCCBs have a number of time delay setting
tripping curve (I2t = constant) avoids overlapping
positions for creating discrimination with a
of the tripping curves.
number of stages.
This option is available on the DPX-630 and
DPX-1600.
Logical discrimination
This is provided between two devices which t (s) B A
communicate via a special link. When the
downstream breaker detects a fault, it sends a
signal to the upstream device which will then have Set at constant I2t
a 50 ms time delay. If the downstream device has
Normal setting
not been able to eliminate the fault during this
time delay, the upstream device will be activated.
The electronic releases of DPX MCCBs are I (A)
designed to perform logical discrimination.
93
Association
of protective devices (continued)

DISCRIMINATION (continued)

Up-stream circuit-breaker
DPX-E 125 (25/36 kA) DPX 160 DPX 250 ER DPX 250 DPX 250 electronic
DPX 125 (25 /36 kA) DPX-H 160 (25 /36/70 kA) DPX-H 250 DPX-H 250 electronic
(25/36/50 kA) DPX-L 250 DPX-L 250 electronic
Down stream
circuit-breaker In (A) 40 63 100 125 40 63 100 160 250 63 100 160 250 40 63 100 160 250
16 0.8 1 1.2 1.2 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
25 0.8 1 1.2 1.2 1 1.6 2.5 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
40 1 1.2 1.2 1 1.6 2.5 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
DPX-E 125
63 1.2 1.2 1.6 2.5 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
100 1.6 2.5 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5
125 1.6 2.5 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5
16 0.8 1 1.2 1.2 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
25 0.8 1 1.2 1.2 1 1.6 2.5 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
DPX 125 40 1 1.2 1.2 1 1.6 2.5 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
(25 kA) 63 1.2 1.2 1.6 2.5 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
100 1.6 2.5 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5
125 1.6 2.5 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5
16 0.8 1 1.2 1.2 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
25 0.8 1 1.2 1.2 1 1.6 2.5 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
DPX 125 40 1 1.2 1.2 1 1.6 2.5 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
(36 kA) 63 1.2 1.2 1.6 2.5 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
100 1.6 2.5 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5
125 1.6 2.5 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5
25 0.4 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
40 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
DPX 160
DPX 250 ER 63 1 1.6 2.5 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
(25/36/50 kA) 100 1.6 2.5 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5
160 2.5 2.5 3.5
250
25 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
40 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
DPX 250 63 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
100 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5
160 2.5 3.5
250
40 0.63 1 1.6 2.5
63 1 1.6 2.5
DPX 250
electronic 100 1.6 2.5
160 2.5
250
25 0.8 1 1.2 1.2 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
40 0.8 1 1.2 1.2 1 1.6 2.5 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
DPX-H 250 63 1 1.2 1.2 1 1.6 2.5 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
DPX-L 250 100 1.2 1.2 1.6 2.5 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
160 1.6 2.5 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5
250 1.6 2.5 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5
40 0.8 1 1.2 1.2 1 1.6 2.5 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
63 1 1.2 1.2 1 1.6 2.5 1 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
DPX-H 250 elec. 100 1.2 1.2 1.6 2.5 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
DPX-L 250 elec. 160 1.6 2.5 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5
250 1.6 2.5 1.6 2.5 3.5 3.5

94
TECHNICAL PART
DPX 630 DPX 630 electronic DPX 1 250 DPX 1600 S1 DPX 1600 S2 Sg DPX 1600 S1 S2 Sg
DPX-H 630 DPX-H 630 electronic DPX-H 1 250
DPX-H 1600 S1 DPX-H 1600 S2 Sg DPX-H 1600 S1 S2 Sg
DPX-L 630 DPX-L 630 electronic DPX-L 1 250
250 320 400 500 630 160 250 400 630 500 630 800 1 000 1 250 630 800 630 800 1 250 1 600
6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 12 T T T T T T T T T T
6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 12 T T T T T T T T T T
6 6 6 6 8 6 6 6 6 12 T T T T T T T T T T
6 6 6 6 8 6 6 6 6 12 T T T T T T T T T T
4 4 4 6 8 6 6 6 6 12 T T T T T T T T T T
4 4 4 6 8 6 6 6 6 12 T T T T T T T T T T
6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 12 16 16 16 16 T T T T T T
6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 12 16 16 16 16 T T T T T T
6 6 6 6 8 6 6 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 T T T T T T
6 6 6 6 8 6 6 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 T T T T T T
4 4 4 6 8 6 6 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 T T T T T T
4 4 4 6 8 6 6 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 T T T T T T
6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 12 16 16 16 16 25 25 T T T T
6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 12 16 16 16 16 25 25 T T T T
6 6 6 6 8 6 6 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 25 25 T T T T
6 6 6 6 8 6 6 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 25 25 T T T T
4 4 4 6 8 6 6 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 25 25 T T T T
4 4 4 6 8 6 6 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 25 25 T T T T
2.5 3.2 4 5 6.3 8 8 8 8 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 T T T T
2.5 3.2 4 5 6.3 8 8 8 8 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 T T T T
2.5 3.2 4 5 6.3 6 6 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 T T T T
2.5 3.2 4 5 6.3 6 6 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 T T T T
2.5 3.2 4 5 6.3 6 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 T T T T
3.2 4 5 6.3 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 T T T T
2.5 3.2 4 5 6.3 8 8 8 8 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 T T T T
2.5 3.2 4 5 6.3 8 8 8 8 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 T T T T
2.5 3.2 4 5 6.3 6 8 8 8 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 T T T T
2.5 3.2 4 5 6.3 6 8 8 8 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 T T T T
2.5 3.2 4 5 6.3 8 8 8 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 T T T T
3.2 4 5 6.3 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 T T T T
4 5 6.3 8 8 8 8 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 T T T T
4 5 6.3 6 6 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 T T T T
4 5 6.3 6 6 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 T T T T
4 5 6.3 6 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 T T T T
4 5 6.3 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 T T T T
2.5 3.2 4 5 6.3 8 8 8 8 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 30 30 30 36
2.5 3.2 4 5 6.3 8 8 8 8 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 30 30 30 36
2.5 3.2 4 5 6.3 6 8 8 8 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 30 30 30 36
2.5 3.2 4 5 6.3 6 8 8 8 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 30 30 30 36
2.5 3.2 4 5 6.3 8 8 8 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 30 30 30 36
3.2 4 5 6.3 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 30 30 30 36
3.2 4 5 6.3 8 8 8 8 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 30 30 30 36
3.2 4 5 6.3 6 6 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 30 30 30 36
3.2 4 5 6.3 6 6 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 30 30 30 36
3.2 4 5 6.3 6 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 30 30 30 36
3.2 4 5 6.3 6 6 12 16 16 16 16 20 20 30 30 30 36

95
Association
of protective devices (continued)

DISCRIMINATION (continued)

Up-stream circuit-breaker
DPX 630 DPX 630 electronic DPX 1 250 DPX 1600 S1
DPX-H 630 DPX-H 630 electronic DPX-H 1 250 DPX-H 1 600 S1
DPX-L 630 DPX-L 630 electronic DPX-L 1 250
Down stream
circuit-breaker In (A) 250 320 400 500 630 160 250 400 630 500 630 800 1 000 1 250 630 800
250 3.2 4 5 6.3 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 15 15
320 4 5 6.3 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 15 15
DPX 630 400 5 6.3 6 10 10 10 6 7,5 15 15
500 6.3 10 10 6 7,5 10 10
630 10 6 7,5 10
250 3.2 4 5 6.3 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 15 15
320 4 5 6.3 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 15 15
DPX-H 630
400 5 6.3 6 10 10 10 6 7.5 15 15
DPX-L 630
500 6.3 10 10 6 7.5 10 10
630 10 6 7.5 10
160 6.3 5 5 5 5 6.3 8 6 8 15 15
DPX 630 elec. 250 6.3 5 5 5 6.3 8 6 8 15 15
400 6.3 5 5 6.3 8 6 8 15 15
630 8 6 8 15
160 6.3 5 5 5 5 6.3 8 6 8 15 15
DPX-H 630 elec. 250 6.3 5 5 5 6.3 8 6 8 15 15
DPX-H 630 elec. 400 6.3 5 5 6.3 8 6 8 15 15
630 8 6 8 15
500 5 8 7.5 15 15
630 8 7.5 15
DPX 1 250 800
1 000 7.5
1 250
500 5 8 7.5 15 15
630 8 7.5 15
DPX-H 1 250 800
DPX-L 1 250
1 000 7.5
1 250
630 15
DPX 630 elec.
800
DPX/DPX-H 630 15
DPX 630 elec. 800
DPX/DPX-H 1 250
S1 S2 Sg 1 600

96
TECHNICAL PART
Upstream fuse

MCCBs gG type
DPX 1 600 S2 Sg DPX 1 600 S1 S2 Sg
DPX-H 1 600 S2 Sg DPX-H 1 600 S1 S2 Sg downstream 250 A 400 A 1 000 A
DPX 125 7 500
630 800 1 250 1 600 DPX 160 10 000
20 20 20 T DPX 250 ER 10 000
20 20 20 T DPX 250 10 000
20 20 20 T
DPX 630 50 000
20 20 20 T
20 20 20 T
20 20 20 36
20 20 20 36
20 20 20 36
20 20 20 36
20 20 36
20 20 20 T
20 20 20 T
20 20 20 T
20 20 T
20 20 20 36
20 20 20 36
20 20 20 36
20 20 36
20 20 20 20
20 20 20
20 20
20 20
20
20 20 20 20
20 20 20
20 20
20 20
20
15 15 20
15 20
15 15 20
15 20
20

97
Association
of protective devices (continued)

DISCRIMINATION (continued)
MCCBs upstream
DPX
DPX 125 DPX 160 DPX 250 ER DPX/H/L 250
MCBs downstream 40 A 63 A 100 A 125 A 63 A 100 A 160 A 63 A 100 A 160 A 250 A 63 A 100 A 160 A 250 A
1 to 4 A T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
6A 6 000 6 000 T T T T T T T T T 6 000 T T T
10 A 5 000 5 000 7 500 7 500 5 000 T T 5 000 T T T 5 000 T T T
13 A 4 000 4 000 6 000 6 000 5 000 T T 5 000 T T T 4 000 T T T
LR 6 000 16 A 4 000 4 000 6 000 6 000 4 000 T T 4000 T T T 4 000 T T T
DX 6 000 - 6 kA 20 A 3 000 3 000 5 000 5 000 4 000 8 000 T 4 000 8 000 T T 4 000 8 000 T T
DX 6 000 - 10 kA 25 A 3 000 3 000 4 500 4 500 3 000 6 000 8 500 3 000 6 000 8 500 T 3 000 6 000 T T
DX-H 10 000 - 25 kA 32 A 2 000 4 000 4 000 2 000 5 000 7 000 2000 5 000 7 000 T 2 000 5 000 T T
C curve 40 A 2 000 3 000 3 000 2 000 4 000 6 000 2 000 4 000 6 000 T 2 000 5 000 T T
50 A 3 000 3 000 4 000 5 500 4 000 5 500 7 000 4 000 8 000 T
63 A 3 000 3 000 3 000 5 000 3 000 5 000 6 000 4 000 8 000 T
80 A 2 000 2 500 5 000 2 500 5 000 6 000 8 000 T
100 A 4 000 4 000 5 000 7 500 T
125 A 2 000 2 000 3 000 3 000 8 000
1 to 4 A T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
6A 6 000 6 000 T T 4 000 T T 4 000 T T T 6 000 T T T
10 A 5 000 5 000 7 500 7 500 4 000 T T 4 000 T T T 5 000 T T T
13 A 4 000 4 000 6 000 6 000 4 000 T T 4 000 T T T 4 000 T T T
16 A 4 000 4 000 6 000 6 000 3 500 6 000 T 3 500 6 000 T T 4 000 T T T
20 A 3 000 3 000 5 000 5 000 3 500 6 000 T 3 500 6000 T T 4 000 8 000 T T
DX 6 000 25 A 3 000 3 000 4 500 4 500 2 500 5 500 8 500 2 500 5 500 8 500 T 3 000 6 000 T T
D curve 32 A 2 000 4 000 4 000 2 500 5 000 7 000 2 500 5 000 7 000 T 2 000 5 000 T T
40 A 2 000 3 000 3 000 2 000 4 500 6 000 2 000 4 500 6 000 T 2 000 5 000 T T
50 A 3 000 3 000 3 500 5 000 3 500 5 500 T 4 000 8 000 T
63 A 3 000 3 000 3 500 5 000 3 500 5 000 6 000 4 000 8 000 T
80 A 1 500 4 000 4 000 5 000 7 000 T
100 A 3 000 3 000 4 000 6 500 T
125 A 1 500 1 500 2 000 2 000 7 000
1 to 4 A T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
6A 6 000 6 000 10 000 10 000 T T T T T T T 6 000 T T T
10 A 5 000 5 000 7 500 7 500 7 000 T T 7 000 T T T 5 000 T T T
LR 6 000 13 A 4 000 4 000 6 000 6 000 7 000 T T 7 000 T T T 4 000 T T T
DX 6 000 - 6 kA 16 A 4 000 4 000 6 000 6 000 5 500 9 500 T 5 500 9 500 T T 4 000 T T T
DX 6 000 - 10 kA 20 A 3 000 3 000 5 000 5 000 5 500 8 500 10 000 5 500 8 500 10 000 T 3 000 8 000 T T
DX-H 10 000 - 25 kA 25 A 3 000 3 000 4 500 4 500 4 500 7 000 8 500 4 500 7 000 8 500 T 3 000 6 000 T T
B curve 32 A 2 000 4 000 4 000 4 500 5 500 7 000 4 500 5 500 7 000 T 2 000 5 000 T T
40 A 2 000 3 000 3 000 5 500 6 000 5 500 6 000 T 2 000 5 000 T T
50 A 3 000 3 000 4 500 5 500 4 500 5 500 10 000 4 000 8 000 T
63 A 3 000 3 000 4 500 5 000 4 500 5 000 8 000 4 000 8 000 T
10 A 30 000 30 000 T T T T T T T T T T T T T
16 A 20 000 20 000 35 000 35 000 20 000 T T 20 000 T T T 40 000 T T
20 A 15 000 15 000 25 000 25 000 15 000 22 000 T 15 000 22 000 T T 33 000 T T
DX-L 25 000 - 50 kA 25 A 12 000 12 000 20 000 20 000 12 000 18 000 T 12 000 18 000 T T 28 000 T T
C curve 32 A 9 000 15 000 15 000 9 000 13 000 T 9 000 13 000 T T 20 000 T T
40 A 6 000 10 000 10 000 6 000 8 000 20 000 6 000 8 000 20 000 25 000 13 000 T T
50 A 5 000 5 000 4 000 10 000 4 000 10 000 20 000 8 000 20 000 T
63 A 5 000 5 000 4 000 10 000 4 000 10 000 15 000 8 000 20 000 T

T= total selection, up to downstream circuit breaker breaking capacity according to IEC 60947-2
98
TECHNICAL PART
DPX
DPX/H/L 630 elec. DPX/H/L 630 DPX/H/L 1250 DPX/H 1600 elec.
250 A 320 A 400 A 160 A 250 A 400 A 630 A 500 A 630 A 800 A 1 000 A 1 250 A 630 A 800 A 1 250 A 1 600 A
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
8000 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T 8 000 8 000 8 000 8 000 10 000 16 000 16 000 16 000 16 000 T T T T
T T T 8 000 8 000 8 000 8 000 10 000 16 000 16 000 16 000 16 000 T T T T
T T T 8 000 8 000 8 000 8 000 10 000 16 000 16 000 16 000 16 000 T T T T
T T T 8 000 8 000 8 000 8 000 10 000 16 000 16 000 16 000 16 000 T T T T
T T T 8 000 8 000 8 000 8 000 10 000 16 000 16 000 16 000 16 000 T T T T
T T T 8 000 8 000 8 000 8 000 10 000 16 000 16 000 16 000 16 000 T T T T
T T T 8 000 8 000 8 000 8 000 10 000 16 000 16 000 16 000 16 000 T T T T
T T T 8 000 8 000 8 000 8 000 10 000 16 000 16 000 16 000 16 000 T T T T

99
Association
of protective devices (continued)

DISCRIMINATION (continued)

Discrimination tables
ACBs/ACBs

DMX-E upstream
1 600 A 2 000 A 2 500 A 3 200 A 4 000 A
800 A T T T T T
1 000 A T T T T
1 250 A T T T
DMX-E 1 600 A T T
downstream 2 000 A T
2 500 A
3 200 A
4 000 A

ACBs/MCCBs

DMX-E upstream
800 A 1 000 A 1 250 A 1 600 A 2 000 A 2 500 A 3 200 A 4 000 A
DPX 125 T T T T T T T T
DPX 160 T T T T T T T T
DPX 250 T T T T T T T T
DPX 250 ER T T T T T T T T
DPX < 400 A T T T T T T T T
down-
stream DPX 630 400 A T T T T T T T T
630 A T T T T T T
800 A T T T T T
DPX 1 600 1 250 A T T
1 600 A T T

T = total selectivity, up to downstream circuit breaker capacity according to IEC 60947-2

100
DISCRIMINATION BETWEEN RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES

TECHNICAL PART
The conditions for coordination of residual current
protection devices (RCDs) are defined in IEC 60364. 2-level discrimination
While ensuring maximum safety, they allow
continued operation of those parts of the
installation which are unaffected by any faults that
may have occurred.
Discrimination between two residual current Upstream
RCD 300 mA
protection devices requires the time/current non-
discriminating
tripping characteristic of the upstream device to (80 ms)
be higher than that of the downstream device.

Total discrimination between a downstream


(A) and upstream (B) device
Downstream
RCD 30 mA
instantaneous
t (20 ms)

B
3-level discrimination
A

RCD 1A,
1 second
delay
I

RCD 300 mA
In practice, the upstream device should have a
discriminating
sensitivity 2 to 3 times lower and a breaking time (130 to 500 ms)
at I∆n at least 3 times longer than the downstream
device. A delay of more than 1 s is not usually
permitted.

RCD 30 mA
instantaneous
(20 to 50 ms)

101
Voltage
Surge
Protectors
(VSP)

Lightning strikes occur


every year and cause
significant damage
throughout the world.
Lightning is a natural
phenomenon which is
increasingly disruptive
to our industrial and
domestic equipment

Find the complete offer


on page 238

102
LIGHTNING, ITS EFFECTS AND CONSEQUENCES

TECHNICAL PART
By their very nature, powerful and unexpected, THE PHENOMENON OF LIGHTNING
lightning strikes often have dramatic consequences
for electrical installations. Lightning is a very powerful electrical discharge
Knowledge of the phenomenon and its effects is caused by a rebalancing of potential between clouds
essential in order to assess the risks and choose or between clouds and ground. Lightning currents
the best protection equipment. can be as much as 10 to 100 kA with a rise time of a
few microseconds.
Lightning can cause considerable damage.
- Cloud-to-ground lightning strike: a “stepped
leader” traces a conductor channel descending
from the cloud to ground and the lightning is
Risk of lightning: discharged as it returns from the ground to the
cloud.
the annual average of stormy days - Ground-to-cloud lightning strike: the leader rises,
and is established from a point connected to earth
(tree, building, lightning conductor, ground, etc).
The lightning strike occurs as it returns with emission
of light (flash), sound (thunder) and the discharge
of an intense current (several hundred kA).

The different types of ground lightning strike


Depending on the direction in which the charge develops and whether
the charge is negative or positive, there are four different types of
ground lightning strike

-- +++
0-1 40 - 59 --- ++
2-4 60 - 79 -- +++
--- ++
5-9 80 - 99
10 - 19 100 - 139
20 - 39 140 - 200 +

+++++ +++++ ----- -----


Negative Positive ground- Positive cloud-to- Negative ground-
cloud-to-ground to-cloud ground to-cloud

Current
1st Rise time t1: 0.3 to 2 ms
I return arc Reset time to half-value t2: 10 to 25 ms Subsequent arcs
Typical shape Peak current I: several tens of kA
of the atmospheric
discharge current I/2

of a lightning
strike
t1 t2 Time

103
Voltage Surge Protectors

LIGHTNING, ITS EFFECTS AND CONSEQUENCES (continued)


Lightning directly or indirectly generates INDIRECT EFFECTS
the following effects: The lightning current and its effects can reach the
- thermal (blow-outs, fire) installation by three means of access:
- electrodynamic (loosening of terminals) - air connections (power, telecoms, television, etc)
- rise in earth voltage (risk of electrocution) entering or exiting the building ➀
- overvoltages of several thousand volts and - the ground, following its increase in potential, via
destructive induced currents (damage to electrical the exposed conductive parts, the earth network
and electronic equipment, interruption of operation) and protective conductors ➁
- conductive loops (structure, etc), internal
DIRECT EFFECTS networks (power, telecoms, etc) ➂
At the point of impact, lightning generates:
- direct thermal effects (melting, fire) caused by the
electrical arc
- thermal and electrodynamic effects induced by
circulation of the lightning current
- blast effects (shock wave and blast air) produced ➂
by air expansion

➀ ➀

As the lightning current is propagated, it creates overvoltages either by


conduction in the live cables ➀ and the earthing conductors ➁ , or by
inductive or capacitive coupling, directly onto the mains supplies ➂ .
It will then damage any connected electrical or electronic equipment.

The effects of a lightning strike can be felt by


induction within a radius of 1 km and by
conduction within a radius of more than 10 km.

104
Simplified electrical models of overvoltages caused by lightning

TECHNICAL PART
Overvoltage on the power line input Voltage returned by the earth Overvoltage induced in a loop

U U
U U

Installation Stray Installation Stray Installation Stray


earth connection capacity earth connection capacity earth connection capacity

When lightning strikes overhead power lines A ground lightning strike causes an increase Associated with the lightning discharge is an
it propagates overvoltages on HV in the earth potential which can spread to the electromagnetic field with a wide frequency
and LV networks of several thousand installation (return from earth). spectrum which, as it connects to the loops in
volts. the installation, will give rise to destructive
induced currents.

ASSESSING THE RISKS OF LIGHTNING - “external connections” to the site (electrical,


telephone networks, etc)
The consequences of lightning strikes and the - the structure and scale of the buildings,
probability of the site being hit by lightning can be the activity (installations for the protection
assessed by carrying out a risk analysis. of the environment, public buildings),
In order to do this, a number of factors must first - the consequences associated with the risks
be considered: (environmental, human, financial, etc)
- an assessment of the meteorological risks, - the sensitivity of equipment (computers,
the storm history electronics, etc)
- specific geographical features of the location - the strategic importance of installations (public
- the nature of the site services, transport, civil or military safety, etc)
- the site to be protected and what it is sheltering - the reasonably acceptable failure rate, its cost,
Thus for a given site it is possible to measure more its consequences, with regard to the various
precisely the degree of protection on the basis protection solutions.
of the risks run:

105
Voltage Surge Protectors
(continued)

PROTECTION AGAINST THE EFFECTS OF LIGHTNING


This is based essentially on:
• catching and discharging the current to earth Lightning conductors with spark-over device
• the use of voltage surge protectors
• passive protection of the installation These are equipped
Passive protection (poor, good) designates the part
with a device which
of the protection provided by the structure and the
creates an
configuration of the installation itself (neutral
earthing system, area, level of equipotentiality, etc.) electrical field at
their tip

DIRECT EFFECTS

Protection against the direct effects of lightning Lightning conductors with earthing wires
relies on catching the current and discharging it to
earth (lightning conductor, catcher rods, etc). This system is used on
top of certain buildings,
Lightning conductors outdoor storage areas,
These protect installations against direct lightning electrical lines
strikes. By catching the lightning and running the (protective ground
discharge current to earth, they avoid the damage wire), etc.
linked to the lightning impact itself and circulation
of the associated current.
There are four categories of lightning conductor.
Lightning conductors with meshed cage

Single rod lightning conductors


(Franklin type)

The meshed cage consists of a network of conductors arranged


around the outside of the building so that its whole volume is
circumscribed. Catcher rods regularly arranged around the
projecting points of the building can be added to this network.
These consist of All the interconnected conductors are connected to the earth
a tip, one or more connection network by several downcoming conductors.
downcoming The level of protection is defined by the size of the mesh.
conductors and Lightning conductors with a meshed cage complete the
an earth connection arrangements for meshing buildings against radiated
electromagnetic fields to which they must be interconnected

106
TECHNICAL PART
The electrogeometric model
After assessing the risk of a lightning stike and its
likely consequences in economic terms, the choice
of lightning catching devices (lightning conductors)
will require an implementation study specific to General principle of the electrogeometric model
each site.
In this approach, the aim will to be to check that the
lightning has a preferential tendency to strike at
precise predetermined points, not other parts of the
buildings or installations.
To achieve this, a so-called “electrogeometric” D
method is used which defines the circular zone
theoretically protected by a lightning conductor
according to the intensity of the discharge current
of the 1st arc. The higher this current, the higher
D
the probability of capture and the wider the
protected zone. D

Protected zone

The electrogeometric model should be adap-


The tip of the leader stroke (or precursor) is deemed
ted according to the protection device: single
to represent the centre of a fictional sphere, with a
rod lightning conductor, meshed cage,
radius D. This sphere follows the random path of the
earthing wires whose protected volumes are
leader stroke. The first element to come into contact
defined in standard IEC 61024-1. This defines
with this sphere will determine the lightning point of
four levels of protection according to the
impact: a tree, a roof, the ground or a lightning
probability of capture.
conductor, if there is one. Beyond the tangent points
of this sphere, protection is no longer provided by the
Level I II III IV
lightning conductor.
Probability The theoretical radius (D) of the sphere is defined by
98 95 90 80
of capture (%) the relationship: D = 10 x I2/3 where D is in metres
Min. capture and I is in kA
2.8 5.2 9.5 14.7
current (kA)
D (m) 15 29 46 96 135 215
Max. spark-over
20 30 45 60 I (kA) 2 5 10 30 50 100
distance (m)
For optimum protection integrating the probable values
For active lightning conductors with a spark-
of the lowest lightning currents (protection level I), the
over device, you should refer to the manufac-
sphere we would be looking at is 20 m (I = 2.8 kA).
turer documentation.

107
Voltage Surge Protectors
(continued)

PROTECTION AGAINST THE EFFECTS OF LIGHTNING (continued)


The protection plan: capture surface areas INDIRECT EFFECTS
When the site to be protected consists of several buildings or
The principle of protection against
extends beyond the range of a single catcher device (lightning
indirect effects of lightning consists of
conductor), it is necessary to draw up a protection plan for the
preventing the interference-bearing, or
area, juxtaposing the different theoretical capture surface
even destructive, energy from reaching
areas. It is always difficult to achieve total coverage of a site
appliances and equipment. To achieve
when it consists of structures of different heights.
this, three conditions must be fulfilled.
Superimposing the protection plan on the site layout shows
- Avoiding the appearance of dangerous
which zones are not covered and where a lightning strike
overvoltages between the appliances
could have destructive effects.
themselves and between the appliances,
the protection circuits and the various
metal conductive parts, is the role of the
equipotential bonding system
Example of protection plan - Minimising the effects of induction due
to fields generated by the lightning
impact itself and by the lightning
conductor downcomers on all the
Storage Car park
conductive loops (electrical power and
communication lines) and also the
Bays
building structures; the appropriate
Manufacturing
Street lighting
location of devices and their wiring can
Aerial limit induced voltages.
Chimney
- Limiting the rise in potential of the
Reception installation by shunting the lightning
current to the low-lying reference
Automatic exchange
Pumping potential (earthing network), is the role of
the voltage surge protectors.
Silo Silo Waste
treatment

On this (fictional) site we can see that the sensitive areas: manu-
facturing, storage, processing etc, have been protected effecti- Damage to electrical instal-
vely by lightning conductors or by a meshed cage, but not areas lations mainly results from
such as reception and the car park which are deemed to be low- the indirect effects of light-
risk. More in-depth consideration shows that the street lighting ning strikes.
illuminating the car park can be struck by lightning and transmit
the lightning strike to the installation, and that the reception area
housing the telephone switchboard and paging aerial (beep)
represents a zone which is both vulnerable and sensitive, the
pumping station is in theory protected by the silo lightning
conductors which are much higher, a situation which must not
however lead us to forget that in this case, a sideways lightning
strike is possible.

108
Radiated electromagnetic field

TECHNICAL PART
The lightning discharge current, whether by direct impact or carried by a lightning conductor downcomer,
generates a field whose electrical and magnetic components reach considerable values: several kV/m and
several tens of microTeslas (µT).
This radiation is received by all the conductors, forming a more or less appropriate aerial, which becomes
the focus of the induced currents. It is particularly on the conductors which make up the wide surface area
loops that the effect of magnetic induction (field H) is predominant.

Coupling loop i

2.5 m 100 m
U

12 m 3m

The field generated by the current i (several kA) in the lightning conductor downcomer connects to the loop
formed by the conductors in the building, generating a voltage U of several kV. This phenomenon also occurs
at a lesser level when there is an impact some distance away, even several hundred metres. By way of
example, a lightning current of 10 kA at 100 m will generate an overvoltage of 600 V in a loop of 30 m2. The
same lightning current in the lightning conductor downcomer (located 3 m away) will generate an overvol-
tage of more than 15 kV. In the 1st case, the overvoltage may be absorbed without too much damage, in the
second it will certainly be destructive. This also illustrates how the presence of a lightning conductor can
only be envisaged if voltage surge protectors are installed in the installation.

Inductive coupling of a single conductor


H on a loop:
voltage U equals: U = M x __
di
L1 dt
U where M is a coefficient characterising the coupling according to distan-
L2
ces L1 and L2, the loop surface area and the magnetic permeability of the
environment. In practice, it is assumed that the loop plane is at right-
angles to the current i (therefore L1 = L2) and that the distance is longer
i than the size of the loop.

109
Voltage Surge Protectors
(continued)

PROTECTION AGAINST THE EFFECTS OF LIGHTNING (continued)

Feedback from earth


When lightning falls on a lightning conductor or even directly on the ground, it causes a local increase in the
earth potential. This then spreads to neighbouring installations via their earth connections and bonding
systems, and to more distant installations via the distribution network.

Installation

Installation Installation
Feedback
from earth
Secondary
spark-over

Local rise in earth potential

Close to the lightning strike, an overvoltage, said to be fed back from earth, spreads from earth to the
network, either via the installation (with destructive effects), or by spark-over in the protectors.
In this last instance, the installation is protected, but other installations supplied by the same mains supply
are not necessarily protected. Overvoltage U, which spreads, can then cause destructive secondary spark-
overs between live conductors and ground, in more distant installations where the earth is referenced to a
different potential. This type of phenomenon can be seen in installations in buildings close to a tall structure
that has been struck by lightning.
To limit the consequences of such phenomena, which are always difficult to foresee, you should:
- Equip all installations supplied by the same LV network with voltage surge protectors
- Make all bonding systems equipotential via interconnected connections. This solution can be executed on
groups of buildings (factory), but does not work in the home.
Note that the neutral conductor, regularly earthed, ensures a certain equipotentiality for the system, but this
is not extended to the installation whose earth connections are separate (TT system). From this point of view,
distribution via a TN system would be more favourable.
Finally, let us add that although they are naturally protected against direct effects, underground distribution
networks can also induce feedback from earth.

110
Passive protection: installation - The geometric separation of circuits intended to
structure and setup limit the crosstalk couplings between the

TECHNICAL PART
conductors of these circuits (the existence of
The numerous links between the buildings coupling loops sensitive to the electromagnetic field
(computer networks, remote monitoring, generated by the lightning is based on dimensional
communications, alarms and power) create and geometric aspects and must therefore be
interference as a result of the effect of the distinguished from the concept of cohabitation
lightning’s electromagnetic field or that of the distance between the conductors themselves).
potential gradient generated by the ground. There - The electrical separation of power supplies
are two ways in which these links can be protected: between the so-called “sensitive” circuits and the
- Shielding or use of Faraday cages which will, in power circuits.
addition to protecting against these fields, mainly - Equipotentiality created by the bonding system, for
consist of maintaining the equipotentiality of the which five levels are suggested.
link (adjacent earthing conductor, twisting,
conductor screen, etc) The risk linked to the direct effects of lightning
- Galvanic decoupling which will separate buildings is never total zero. The additional cost of
electrically (optocouplers, fibre optics, isolation protection devices, compared to the potential
transformers, etc). losses, is negligible and is reimbursed when
The terms “installation structure and setup” refer the 1st incident happens. But voltage surge
to: protectors are not a panacea if they are incor-
- Earth connection schemes (or neutral earthing porated in a badly designed installation. It is
systems) whose type has an influence on the above all through the precautions taken in the
behaviour of the installation and hence on the installation structure and setup (passive
choice of voltage surge protectors. protection) that the best protection will be
established.

Passive protection: configuration logic


Passive protection is defined by independent concepts, and some people may find it difficult to appreciate its qualita-
tive value precisely: scale of the installation, separation of circuits, level of equipotentiality.
The logic diagram should therefore be read as an indicator of the level of passive protection:
- good when a maximum number of criteria are in the green zone
- poor when a majority are in the red
- and average in the intermediate cases (eg: TN system, but not very large site).
Neutral earthing system
TT IT TN
Scale of the installation (number of loops)
very large (site) large (block of flats) small (house)
Geometric separation of circuits
not separate (coupling) separate shielded (not much coupling)
Separation of the power supply for sensitive circuits
same power supply separate power supply separate supply
Level of equipotentiality
0 1 2 3 4
protection conductors earthing conductors equipotential links meshing of blocks total meshing

111
Voltage Surge Protectors
(continued)

PROTECTION AGAINST THE EFFECTS OF LIGHTNING (continued)


Active protection: voltage surge voltage to pass through which might damage
protectors the electrical equipment.
Installation in cascade is necessary by adding one
The VSP is a passive component which becomes or two additional voltage surge protectors:
active when it responds to a lightning strike. - by lowering the value of the residual voltage
It behaves like an automatic switch, shunting to a value less than the Up of the last voltage surge
the current when it is subject to transient protector, an acceptable level for the equipment
overvoltage (atmospheric origin). to be protected
A single voltage surge protector may prove - by discharging an additional part of the original
insufficient to protect the whole of an overcurrent to earth
installation effectively: it could allow residual

Principle of active protection

L
N 20% of the original
4% of the
overcurrent 1 First (main)
original
100% of the voltage surge protector
overcurrent
original 2
overcurrent
Second voltage surge protector
3 Proximity voltage surge protector

Stays between 3
0 and 1% of
the original
80% of the overcurrent
original 1 2
16% of the
overcurrent
original
discharged
overcurrent
by the VSP

Reducing
the overvoltage
with voltage a few
µs
surge protectors low supply voltage
in cascade 230/400 V - 50 Hz

20 ms 40 ms 20 ms 40 ms 20 ms 40 ms
10 ms 30 ms 50 ms 10 ms 30 ms 50 ms 10 ms 30 ms 50 ms

Without voltage surge protector Main voltage surge protector Main voltage surge protector
+ proximity voltage surge protector

112
VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTORS

TECHNICAL PART
CHARACTERISTICS AND TYPOLOGY

Two concepts are essential in order to define


the characteristics of a VSP:
- its flow-to-earth capacity Components used in voltage surge protectors
- its protection level VSP are based mainly on the use of 3 types of
There are three main types of VSP: component. The voltage/time characteristics
- Class 1 (VSP to be used in the case of buildings illustrated by the curves below show 2 operating
equipped with a lightning conductor), VSP modes:
characterised by a flow-to-earth current in the form
of a conventional wave 10/350 which is closest > voltage breaking
to the direct lightning current wave.
U
This VSP therefore has a high capacity for Spark-over
discharging the energy. It is used to reduce
the difference in potential between the lightning
protection system and the electrical installation
during flow-to-earth of the installation lightning
conductor lightning current. In an apartment block,
it can be replaced by class 2 VSP located at the
Spark gap
source of each of the shunted installations.
It is characterised by I imp. µs
- Class 2 (VSP for general applications), a VSP
characterised by a flow-to-earth current in the form > voltage limiting
of an 8/20 wave, a conventional current wave U
closest to the current waves due to the indirect
effects of the lightning. It is characterised by I max.
- Class 3 (used for final protection), a VSP Peak limiting
characterised by a combined wave (voltage 1.2/50;
current 8/20) and by Uoc.

Variable resistor
µs
U
Peak limiting

FOR MORE INFORMATION


Zener diode
See the on-line catalogue:
(extremely fragile)
instructions, technical data
µs
sheets, etc.

113
Voltage Surge Protectors
(continued)

RULES FOR INSTALLING VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTORS


CONNECTING VOLTAGE SURGE
PROTECTORS Connection in parallel
Class 1 and 2 VSP are connected in parallel on the
electrical installation.
Class 3 VSP can be installed in parallel or in series S
depending on the manufacturer’s recommendations. Uimp
P Up
D
Receiver

Phase or neutral
Connection principles terminal block

For the voltage surge protector to perform its function


as well as possible, it must be installed:
- as a tap-off
- keeping as short a connection length as possible Max.
distance: 0.5 m
between the phase-neutral terminal block and the PE or
PEN terminal block Cross-section:
2
6 mm min
- in accordance with EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) MCB (16 mm2 with
rules: avoid the use of loops, fix the cables against metal (VSP protection) direct lighting
VSP protection)
conductive parts

Main terminal block


protective conductors

Some wiring configurations can create couplings between the VSP upstream and downstream conductors,
which are likely to cause the lightning wave to spread throughout the installation.

Ph
Ph N N
PE Ph

N
Ph

PE PE PE

Upstream and downstream Conductors connected on Return conductor from Conductors for connecting
conductors connected on the same terminal but well the VSP close to the the VSP kept separate
the VSP with a common path separated (circuit VSP) incoming conductors and as short as possible
(main VSP)

114
TECHNICAL PART
EARTH CONNECTION
The equipotential bonding system is essential
Standards bodies use the generic term “earthing to maintain a low reference potential.
device” to designate both the concept of equipotential The VSP should be connected to this bonding
bonding system and that of an earth connection system for maximum effectiveness.
without distinguishing between them.
Contrary to received opinion, the value of the earth
connection, guaranteed at low frequency to ensure SENSITIVITY OF DEVICES
people’s safety, does not have a direct correlation
to effectiveness of the protection provided by VSP. The recipe for effective protection using a voltage
As demonstrated below, this type of protection can be surge protector should be based on the comparison
established even in the absence of an earth between the prospective value of the lightning
connection. strike dependng on the location and impulse
The impedance opposing the flow-to-earth current withstand of the equipment to be protected
shunted by the VSP can be broken down into two parts. (overvoltage withstand categories).
The first, the earth connection, is formed by the
conductors, which are usually wires and by the ground
Uimp (kV)
resistance. Its essentially inductive nature means that Overvoltage Equipment type and
its effectiveness decreases with the frequency in spite category characteristics Controlled Natural
situation(1) situation(2)
of the wiring precautions taken.
The second part of this impedance is less visible but Equipment installed upstream
essential at high frequency because it is in fact made of the switchboard: meter, gauge,
IV 6 4
fuse carrier and main circuit-
up of the stray capacity between the installation and breaker, etc
earth.
Equipment forming part
of the fixed installation: wiring
The value of the earth connection low accessories, circuit breakers,
frequency resistance must comply with local III socket outlets, trunking, junction 4 2.5
installation regulations. There must only be boxes, or permanently connected
one earth network. Distinct independent equipment for industrial use:
motors, furnaces, etc
circuits (computers, lightning conductor
downcomer) should be prohibited, but this
Everyday equipment designed
does not exclude multiple earth connections
II to be connected: household tools 2.5 1.5
(electrodes) if they are all interconnected. and appliances

Sensitive equipment with


Of course the relative values of each of these
reduced withstand incorporating
components vary according to the type and scale of the I electronic circuits. 1.5 0.8
installation, the location of the VSP (main or proximity Proximity or integrated protection
type) and according to the earth connection scheme may be desirable
(neutral earthing system) but it is demonstrated that (1) Installations where transient overvoltages are reduced
the voltage surge protector’s share of the discharge (> Uimp)(by protection on the line itself or at the installation source
current can reach 60 to 90% on the equipotential (eg: protected overhead network).
system whereas the part directly discharged by the (2) Installations where the risk is naturally low and for which VSP
earth connection is around 10 to 50%. is not usually considered necessary (eg: network entirely underground).

115
Voltage Surge Protectors
(continued)

RULES FOR INSTALLING VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTORS (continued)


CONNECTION LENGTH RECOMMENDED CROSS-SECTIONS
In practice we recommend that the total length FOR CONDUCTORS LINKING VOLTAGE
of the VSP circuit does not exceed 50 cm. SURGE PROTECTORS
This requirement is not always easy to
implement, but using the available earths
nearby may help to satisfy it. Cross-section
Capacity Iimp (mm2)

Standard (S) 6
Class 2

Increased (I) 10

High (H) 10 kA 16
Class 1

Lightning arrestor >12.5 kA 16

The 0.5 m rule


In theory, when lightning strikes, the voltage Ut applied to the receiver is the
UI1
same as the protection voltage Up of the VSP (for its In) but in practice the
latter is higher. In effect, the voltage dips caused by the connection
Ud
conductor impedances of the VSP and its protection device are added to this:
Ut = UI1 + Ud + UI2 + Up + UI3 Lt Ut
UI2 receiver
By way of example, the voltage dip in 1 m of conductor travelled over by an
impulse current 10 kA for 10 µs will reach 1000 V Up

∆u = L x __
di
dt UI3
di: current variation 10,000 A
dt: time variation 10 µs
L: inductance of 1 m of conductor = 1 µs
Vaue ∆u to be added to the voltage Up
The total length Lt must therefore be as short as possible; in practice we recommend not exceeding 0.5 m.
In the event of difficulty, it may be a good idea to use wide, flat conductors (insulated braids, flexible
insulated bars).

116
TECHNICAL PART
COORDINATING VSP This arrangement of several VSP requires them to
be coordinated so that each of them draws the
Installation of several VSP allows gradual peak energy in an optimum way and limits spreading of
limitng of the overvoltages generated by the the lightning strike through the installation as much
lightning. This cascade is essential when the as possible. The coordination of VSP is a complex
distance between the VSP and the equipment is too concept which needs to be the subject of specific
great, but also when the level of peak limiting on studies and tests. Minimum distances between VSP
the main VSP is insufficient, which is the case or the interpositioning of decoupling chokes are
whenever senstive equipment needs to be recommended by manufacturers.
protected. For highly sensitive equipment a third
level, known as proximity, is even necessary.
Coordination modules
Minimum distances between Legrand coordination
voltage surge protectors in one installation Coordination modules modules Cat.
Nos. 039 62/63 are used
Distance to coordinate two VSP
Upstream VSP Downstream VSP
(in metres) in the same switchboard
d<2m
Increased (I) 8 (up to 63 A), without
Lighting arrestor
Standard (S) 10 taking acount of the
Increased (I) 6
distances between them.
It is necessary to install
High (H) Standard (S) 8
1 module per live
Proximity (P) 10
conductor on the circuit
Standard (S) 4
Increased (I) to be protected.
Proximity (P) 6
Standard (S) Proximity (P) 2

Coordinating voltage surge protectors


Primary and seconday VSP must be coordinated so that the total energy
to be dissipated (E1 + E2) is shared between them according to their
flow-to-earth capacity.
Primary v.s.p. Secondary v.s.p.
The recommended distance d1 enables decoupling of the VSP, and thus
avoids too much of the energy passing directly into the secondary VSP,
E1 E2
which could destroy it.
This is a situation which in fact depends on the characteristics of each
of the VSP.
Up1 Up2 Two identical VSP (for example Up: 2 kV and Imax: 70 kA) can be
d1
installed without the distance d1 being necessary: the energy will be
split roughly equally between the two VSP. But two different VSP
(for example Up: 2 kV/Imax: 70 kA and Up: 1.2 kV/Imax: 15 kA) should
be separated by at least 10 m to avoid too much demand being placed
on the second VSP.

117
Voltage Surge Protectors
(continued)

RULES FOR INSTALLING VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTORS (continued)


PROTECTED LENGTHS The risk of resonance is linked to the installation
characteristics (conductors, equipotential bonding
The implementation of good VSP must absolutely systems) and the potential overvoltage increase is
take account of the length of the lines supplying linked to the value of the impulse current.
the receivers to be protected. The rules for recommended maximum lengths
In fact, above a certain length, the voltage applied therefore arise from a certain empiricism that can
to the receiver can, by means of a resonance be based on three key starting points:
phenomenon, well exceed the expected limiting - position of the VSP
voltage. - composition of the equipotential bonding system
- cross-section of conductors

Maximum line length between voltage surge protector and appliance to be protected
Voltage surge protector position at supply end of installation not at supply end of installation
large cables wiring large cables
Conductor cross-section wiring (domestic)
(industry) (domestic) (industry)
Composition PE conductor < 10 m 10 m < 10 m(1) 20 m(1)
of the
equipotential
bonding system meshed/equipotential 10 m 20 m 20 m(1) 30 m(1)
(1) protection recommended at the point of use if distance is greater

Start of resonance d

Above a certain length d, the circuit protected by the VSP


Ld
will start resonating when the inductance and Ud I

capacitance are equal: (Lw = - __


1 ).
Cw Uimp Uc C
The circuit impedance is then reduced to its resistance.
Despite the part absorbed by the VSP, the residual Urm
Lrm
lightning current I on the circuit is still impulse-based.
Its increase, due to resonance, will result in significant
increases in the Ud, Uc and Urm voltages. In these C: capacity representing the load
conditions, the voltage applied to the receiver can Ld: power supply line inductance
double. Lrm: equipotential bonding system inductance

118
COMMON MODE AND RESIDUAL CURRENT MODE

TECHNICAL PART
There are two lightning overvoltage modes: Phase/neutral protection in a TT system is justified
- common mode when the neutral on the distributor side is linked to
- residual current mode a connection with a low value (a few ohms whereas
Lightning overvoltages appear mainly in common the installation earth connection is several tens of
mode and usually at the supply end of the electrical ohms).
installation. The current return circuit then risks being made by
Overvoltages in residual current mode usually the installation neutral in preference to the earth.
appear in TT mode and primarily affect sensitive The residual current mode voltage U, between
equipment (electronic equipment, computers, etc). phase and neutral, can increase up to a value equal
to the sum of the residual voltages of each element
of the VSP, ie. double the level of protection in
common mode.
Common mode protection
between phase/neutral and earth
Distributor Installation
Ph
Id Metering U
L1 Imc
L2 L N
L3 Imc Application
N N

Us1 Us2
Imc

5 50
Transformer

A similar phenomenon may occur in a TN-S system


Residual current mode if both the N and PE conductors are separate or not
protection between phase and neutral properly equipotential. The current is then likely to
make use of the neutral conductor on its return
rather than the protective conductor and the
equipotential bonding system.
Id Imd
L L A theoretical optimum protection model, which
Usd Imd Application
N N applies to all neutral earthing systems, can be
defined, although in fact VSP nearly always combine
common mode protection and residual current
mode protection (except IT or TN-C models).
Transformer

119
Voltage Surge Protectors
(continued)

LOCATION OF THE VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTORS

For effective voltage surge Level of protection


protection, it may be necessary Equipment sensitivity
to combine a number of VSP: Standard High Very high
- main VSP ➀ Very sensitive
- circuit VSP ➁ (computers, electronic goods) ➀+➂ ➀+➂ ➀+➁+➂
- proximity VSP ➂
Sensitive
(household appliances) ➀ ➀+➁ ➀+➁+➂
Not very sensitive
(motor, heaters) ➀ ➀ ➀+➁

Supply end of installation Distribution level Application level


L1
L2
L3
N

Main Proximity
protection protection

Circuit
protection

The protection at the supply end Circuit protection (secondary) Proximity protection (final) performs final
(primary) of the installation is supplements the previous peak limiting on residual current mode
used to shunt the majority of the protection by coordination and overvoltages, which are the most
incident energy (common mode limits residual current mode dangerous for appliances. Although they
overvoltage carried by the power overvoltages arising from the are often integrated within VSP,
system) to the equipotential actual configuration of the the effectiveness of a common mode
bonding system and to earth installation protection (phase/earth and
neutral/earth) is usually limited at final
level by the length of the protective
conductors

All Legrand VSP


See page 238

120
PROTECTION UPSTREAM OF THE INSTALLATION

TECHNICAL PART
VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTORS
Electrical installations with voltage surge
protectors must be protected by disconnectors
Installation principles according to
against the effects of heat and short-circuits. the neutral earthing system
After each lightning strike has discharged, the
> VSP in TN system
leakage current increases slightly. Over time, the
variable resistor component ages and heats up. An
HV / LV Protection Metering Distribution Board
internal disconnection device removes the voltage Transformer
surge protector from the circuit at the end of its life;
an LED or contact signals this disconnection status L1
L2
so that the module can be replaced. L3
Above a maximum flow-to-earth value, the voltage PEN N
PE
surge protector will be destroyed by short-
circuiting.
A protection device against short-circuits and
overloads should be installed in series upstream of
the voltage surge protector. Disconnectors will have > VSP in TT system
to comply with the discrimination values of the
upstream protection. HV / LV Protection Metering Distribution Board
Transformer

L1
L2
L3
N
VSP and continuity of service I n
=
type S
Installing VSP should not harm continuity delayed

of service, which would be contrary to the PE


desired aim. They should therefore be
installed, especially at the supply end
of the domestic or similar installations
(TT earthing systems), in accordance with > VSP in IT system
an S type delayed residual current device.
One precaution which should not be HV / LV Protection Metering Distribution Board
Transformer
forgotten is that for significant lightning
strikes (> 5 kA). L1
L2
L3

PE

Disconnectors suitable for Legrand VSP


See page 129

121
Voltage Surge Protectors
(continued)

SETUP (continued)
The outline diagram on the facing page represents the
general architecture of an installation, its physical Contrary to received opinion, it is not essential
levels between the power supply and the application to link the VSP to the main earth terminal
and also the various links to the protective conductors, when it is too far away. Connection to the
the exposed conductive parts and the earth. nearest, most accessible equipotential link is
The number of distribution levels has been limited to 3. more effective if the 0.5 m rule is adhered to.
In practice a larger number can be observed. The minimum recommended cross-section for
Remember that this architecture does not differ the connection conductors takes account of the
fundamentally between a very high power installation maximum discharge current value and the
(industry) and a low power installation (domestic). It is characteristics of the end of life protection
simply the scale and the number of distribution levels device (DX circuit breakers).
which differ. In domestic installations for example, It is pointless to increase this cross-section to
the installation is reduced to a single level. compensate for a connection distance which is
The level called connection designates both HV and LV too great. At high frequency, the increase in
connection but in fact it is only a question of a legal the conductor impedance is directly linked to
property limit which does not alter the basic electrical their length.
diagram. However, the risk of lightning on the LV link
between the transformer and the main distribution
level could be very different by reason of its nature:
Depending on the activity (EMC sensitivity), the quality
- conductors several hundred metres in length,
or age of the installation; the local equipotential links
sometimes overhead, for public distribution
(solid green line on the diagram) between each
- short conductors, usually protected by buildings,
distribution board and the surrounding local
in industry or large-scale service industry.
conductive parts are more or less in place.
But although they may be systematically established at
Operating circuits (terminals, proximity tables, main distribution level, this is more rarely the case at
direct applications) can be supplied directly final distribution level.
from the main LV distribution board. These These intentional links are often supplemented by
circuits and their devices are therefore subject unintentional links:
to more restrictive conditions (Ik, Uimp) than - simple contact of devices with the ground (by their
they would be at final distribution level. They fixings, by their physical situation on the machine
must therefore be appropriately protected. frame for example)
- shielding of data conductors (computing)
- exposed conductive part (0 potential) of electronic
equipment.
In practice the entry points for overvoltages and
This diagram (facing page) reveals the multiplicity of
feedback from earth are innumerable, especially when
links with earth and therefore, unfortunately, feedback
installations are spread over a wide area. In some
points due to lightning strikes (EMC, equipotentiality in
cases, lightning conductors can protect buildings
the switchboards, circuits for protecting people against
which are located electrically on a secondary
indirect contacts).
distribution level. The overvoltage that they create at
local ground level would also be more likely to spread
to the final circuits.

122
Outline diagram of an equipotential bonding system

TECHNICAL PART


Example of arrangement of voltage surge protectors used on a large-scale industrial or commercial installation
Number in Type of VSP
the diagram With lightning conductor Without lightning conductor

➀ Possible surge arrester (IT system) installed in the transformer station


Class 2 high capacity VSP(1) (H)
➁ VSP accompanying a Class 1 lightning conductor
or Class 2 increased capacity VSP(1) (I)
Class 1 VSP (if lightning conductor on separate building
Class 2 increased capacity VSP(1) (I) or Class 2
➂ powered by a secondary level or distribution)
or Class 1/Class 2 high capacity VSP (H) standard capacity VSP(1) (S)

➃ Class 2 increased capacity VSP (I) Class 2 standard capacity VSP(1) (S)

➄ Class 2 standard capacity VSP (S) Class 2 standard capacity VSP(2) (S)

➅ Proximity VSP(2) on terminals (P) Proximity VSP(2) on terminals (P)

➆ VSP(2) incorporated in the receiver VSP(2) incorporated in the receiver


(1) The types of VSP should be chosen according to the exposure conditions, the nature of the circuits and the installation passive protection
(2) Depending on the sensitivity of receivers

123
Voltage Surge Protectors
(continued)

PRACTICAL EXAMPLES OF MOUNTING

Main installation VSP: Elements of the chassis,


the support rail, uprights and steel rails of
equipotential because XL3 enclosures have
of how it is mounted, can conductivity which
be used for the shortest ensures the equipotential
VSP connection continuity required for
connection of the VSP
terminal block, in this
example a 70 kA high
capacity model

Increased capacity VSP


(40 kA), at the supply end
of an industrial control
system enclosure:
the solid mounting plate
(galvanised steel)
provides the equipotential
bonding and connection
to earth

The use of exposed conductive parts for equipotential bonding purposes for VSP must of course be
accompanied by precautions for construction and setup.
The continuity of the enclosure conductive parts means that they can be used as PE conductors but also for
connecting the VSP. It should also be noted than in addition to being easily accessible and allowing the 0.5 m
rule to be adhered to, the conductive parts of XL3 enclosures have a much lower high-frequency impedance
(typical inductance < 0.01 µH/m) than that of a conductor.
Exposed conductive parts on other enclosures than XL3 or rails, especially in aluminium, should not be used
for connnecting voltage surge protectors without checking first that they are suitable. In case of doubt, it is
then preferable to keep a wire conductor for linking the protective conductors to the terminal block or
collector.

124
PROTECTION OF TELEPHONE LINES

TECHNICAL PART
When VSP are installed on the low voltage network, it is advisable to add VSP on the telecommunications
network.

If electrical installations are referenced to an equipotential bonding system


which is itself connected to a local earth, the telephone installations are
usually referenced to a “distant earth” whose potential is not influenced by
that of the “electrical earth”.
During a lightning strike, an overvoltage will appear between the
installation conductive parts and the telephone line, creating danger for any
telephone user. The risk exists, by the way, irrespective of which network is
hit by lightning, telephone or power.
Legrand VSP Cat. No. 038 28 for
The solution therefore consists in extreme cases of galvanically separating
the telephone network (special translators) or more simply installing analogue lines and Cat. No. 038 29
special VSP whose earth terminal should be properly connected to the for digital lines are ideal for use in
installation equipotential bonding system. telephone applications

Distant earth

125
Voltage Surge Protectors
(continued)

INSTALLATION OF TELEPHONE VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTORS


Legrand telephone VSP are installed in series.

Installation principles

> Analogue > Digital

Cat. No. 038 28


Cat. No. 038 29
Room Digital
Sitting room telephone
DTI Distributor Cat. No. 038 29
Hall or fax
DNT
Kitchen
110 V
etc Visio-
Cat. No. 038 29
conference
Cat. No. 038 29

> Analogue or digital


Cat. No. 038 28

DNT Analogue line


Cat. No. 038 83 Analogue
110 V telephone
Digital line
or fax
DNT
110 V
Digital
Cat. No. 038 29 visio-
conference
Cat. No. 038 29

126
SOME LOCAL INSTALLATION REGULATIONS

TECHNICAL PART
In Europe and throughout the world (1), VSP are widely recommended by all the national bodies
and electricity suppliers. The familiar local standards and guides to installation are:

Recommended values
at the source of the installation
Level of requirement Overhead-
Country Guide Lightning conductor(2)
of national regulations underground
present on the
links without
building
lightning conductor
NF C 15-100
Class 1 Class 2
Lightning conductor for all zones
France UTE C 15-443 Iimp > 12.5 kA In > 5 kA
Overhead lines or overhead-
Up < 2.5 kV Up < 2.5 kV
underground lines in AQ2 Zone

Class 1 Class 2
Iimp > 10 kA In > 10 kA
Italy CEI 81-8 No national obligations in 2005 Up according to Up according to
the equipment the equipment
to be protected to be protected

Class 1
VSP compulsory if risks to: Class 2
Recommended, but not
human or animal life, public Compulsory no min.
BT-23 compulsory, no min.
Spain equipment, economic, agricultural value required in 2005.
(Table A and B) value required.
or industrial activities Consult the
Consult the
Recommended in AQ2 zones manufacturers
manufacturers

DIN V VDE V 100


Germany
DIN V VDE V 0185

IEC 60364-4-44 Class 1 Class 2


Other countries
IEC 60364-5-53 Iimp > 12.5 kA In > 5 kA

(1) Refer to pages 108-110


(2) Telecommunication VSP recommended

127
Voltage Surge Protectors
(continued)

CHARACTERISTICS OF LEGRAND VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTORS


VSP FOR POWER LINES

Lightning High Standard


Increased capacity (I)
arrestor capacity (H) capacity (S)

Cat. No. 039 10 039 20/21/22/23 039 30/31/33 039 35/36/38 039 40/41/43

Mains supply 230/400 V 110/230/400 V 110/230 V

Neutral earthing system TT, TN, IT TT, TN

Max. steady state voltage (Uc) 440 V 320 V

Frequency 50/60 Hz

Class 1 1/2

I max wave 8/20 µs 70 kA 40 kA 15 kA

wave 10/350 µs 12.5 kA 10 kA

Level of
1.8 kV - 20 kA 2 kV - 20 kA 1.8 kV - 15 kA 1.4 kV - 15 kA
protection Common mode
1.3 kV - 5 kA 1.5 kV - 5 kA 1.3 kV - 5 kA 1.2 kV - 5 kA
Up - In
Withstand to temporary
440 V 400 V
overvoltages Ut
260 V 20 kA

Ik at Uc 320 V 4 kA
(C20-C40)
440 V 4 kA

Leakage current at Uc (Ic) < 1 mA

Follower current (Is) Zero

Response time 25 ns

Max. Rigid conductor 25 mm2


terminal
capacity Flexible conductor
16 mm2
with cable end

Degree of protection IP 20 installation in an enclosure

Operating
-10°C to +40°C
temperature
Environment
Storage
-20°C to + 70°C
temperature

128
TECHNICAL PART
DISCONNECTORS FOR USE TELEPHONE VOLTAGE SURGE
IN ASSOCIATION** PROTECTORS
TT* TN IT Analogue Digital
without
neutral 038 28 038 29

Standard capacity C 20 A Nominal voltage 170 V 48 V


5/15 kA class 2 C 20 A F 40 A gG
Uc = 320 V (14 x 51) Maximum discharge
10 kA
current (Imax)
C 20 A
Increased capacity F 125 A gG Protection level (UP) 300 V 100 V
15/40 kA class 2 C 20 A (22 x 58)
Uc = 320 V or Terminal capacity
C 40 A flexible/rigid 0.5 to 2.5 mm2

C 20 A C 20 A Degree of protection IP 20
Increased capacity F 125 A gG F 125 A gG
15/40 kA class 2 C 20 A (22 x 58) (22 x 58) Operating
- 10°C to + 40°C
Uc = 440 V or or temperature
C 40 A C 40 A
Storage temperature - 20°C to + 70°C

High capacity C 40 A C 40 A
20/70 kA class 1/2 C 40 A F 160 A gG F 160 A gG
Uc = 440 V (T00) (T00)

Lightning arrestor C 40 A C 40 A
12.5 kA class 1 C 40 A F 160 A gG F 160 A gG
Uc = 440 V (T00) (T00)

* Cartridge fuses prohibited


** DX, DX-H, DX-L depending on short circuit current in use

129
Isolation

Designed to separate an

installation or part of an

installation electrically,

the purpose of isolation is

to ensure the safety of people

working on the installation

Find the complete offer


on page 200

130
ISOLATION

TECHNICAL PART
A switching device providing the isolation function ensures a minimum contact opening distance of:
must be installed: - 4 mm for 230/400 V voltage
- at the source of any installation - 8 mm for 400/690 V voltage
- at the source of each circuit or group of circuits - 11 mm for 1000 V voltage
The isolator must break all the live conductors
(including the neutral). In contrast, the PE and For double break devices the distances should be
PEN conductors must not be broken. multiplied by 1.25.
The devices which perform isolation may be
isolators, isolating switches, circuit-breakers,
socket outlets, fuse carriers, isolating blades,
disconnect terminals or any other device which

Isolation does not on its own ensure that the installation is made safe. Appropriate methods should be
employed to prevent any unwanted re-energizing (padlocking, signs, locked rooms, earthing) and put the
installation out of use.

Isolation with positive contact indication Isolation with visible contact indication
This characteristic is checked by reliable interlocking The actual position of the separate contacts is
between the position of the contacts and that of the directly visible. Visible contact indication can be
control switch handle. The indication “I” or “O” (red obtained by means of a display window (Vistop,
or green) on the handle thus guarantees the actual DPX-IS) or by using plug-in or draw-in devices
contact position. (DPX, DMX-E).

Legrand solutions

DPX-IS 250

Full load switch unit:


DPX-IS 630 used for emergency breaking Draw-out DPX 630
and isolation

131
Isolation

CONNECTING VISTOP UNITS

Maximum capacities for each pole


Connection Busbars Conductors Copper terminals Aluminium terminals
standard compact standard compact

Cross-section
(mm2)
Mode Width S - Ø S - Ø S - Ø S - Ø
(mm) rigid flexible (mm2 - mm) (mm2 - mm) (mm2 - mm) (mm2 - mm)

12 70 50
Direct in
cage terminal

048 67 6 x 35 6 x 25
63 - 100 - 125 - 160 A

Distribution
terminal
for rail fixing
VISTOP

227 78/79 30 150-10 195-10 150-12 195-10


Plate
connection box

227 80/81 18 185 150


Cage
connection box
160

20 95-10 195-10 95-12 195-10


Direct on
plate

132
CONNECTING DPX-IS UNITS

Maximum capacities for each pole

TECHNICAL PART
Connection Busbars Conductors Copper terminals Aluminium terminals
standard compact standard compact

Cross-section
(mm2)
Mode Width S - Ø S - Ø S - Ø S - Ø
(mm) rigid flexible (mm2 - mm) (mm2 - mm) (mm2 - mm) (mm2 - mm)

32 150-12 300-10 240-12 300-10


Direct on
plate

25 300 240
262 60
DPX-IS

Cage terminal
250

50 2 x 185-12 2 x 300-10 2 x 185-12 2 x 300-12


262 48/49
Spreaders

32 2 x 300-16 2 x 300-16
263 50/51
Rear terminals with screws

50 300 - 14 300 - 16
Direct
DPX-IS

on plate
630

2 x 240 2 x 185 300 - 16


262 69
Terminal for
2 conductors

80 4 x 300 - 14 4 x 300 - 16 4 x 300 - 14


262 73/74
Spreaders
DPX-IS

1600

50 4 x 300 - 14 4 x 300 - 16 4 x 300 - 14

263 80/82
Rear terminals

50 300 - 14 300 - 16
Direct
on plate

133
Distribution

Protection and switching


of operating circuits are
the basic functions
of a distribution panel.
But upstream there is another
function, possibly more
discreet, but just as essential:
distribution.

Find the complete offer


on page 240

134
The selection and setup of distribution equipment Depending on the intensity used, distribution is
call for an approach combining product selection achieved by distribution blocks (up to 400 A)

TECHNICAL PART
(number of outputs, conductor types and and sets of busbars (usually above 250 A).
cross-sections, connection method) and checking
operating conditions (permissible current,
short-circuit level, isolation, etc) in multiple
configurations.

Distribution can be defined as the supply of a number of physically separate


and individually protected circuits from a single circuit

Upstream
protection device

Distribution

Downstream
protection devices

I1 I2 I3 I4

135
Distribution

BUSBARS

DETERMINING THE CONDUCTOR Current according to standard IEC 60947-1


CROSS-SECTION
Ie: rated operating current to be taken into
The required cross-section of the bars is
consideration in enclosures with natural
determined according to the operating current,
ventilation or in panels which have protection
the IP protection class of the enclosure and after
class IP < 30.
checking the short-circuit thermal stress.
Ithe: thermal current in enclosure
The currents are named according to the
corresponding to the most severe installation
definitions in standard IEC 60947-1 applied to the
conditions. Weatherproof enclosures do not
usual operating conditions for a temperature rise
allow natural renewal of the air.
∆t of the bars which does not exceed 65 °C.
The IP protection class is > 30.

Parallel bars

The permissible current in n bars is less than n times the permissible current in one bar.
By way of example, use n = 1.6 to 1.8 for a group of 2 bars, n = 2.2 to 2.4 for 3 bars and n = 2.7 to 2.9 for 4 bars.
The wider the bars, the more this coefficient is affected, the more difficult they are to cool and the higher the
mutual inductance effects. The permissible current density is not therefore constant: it is approximately 3 A/mm2
for small bars and drops to 1 A/mm2 for groups of large bars.

Rigid bars on supports Cat. Nos. 373 15/21, Cat. Nos. 373 20/22 and Cat. Nos. 374 14/53

Rigid flat copper bars - edgewise mounting


le(A) IP30 Ithe(A) IP >30 Cat. No. Dimensions (mm) I2t (A2s) Icw1s (A)
110 80 373 88 12 x 2 1,2 x 107 3430
160 125 373 89 12 x 4 4,7 x 107 6865
200 160 374 33 15 x 4 7,4 x 107 8580
250 200 374 34 18 x 4 1 x 108 10295
280 250 374 38 25 x 4 2,1 x 108 14300
330 270 374 18 25 x 5 3,2 x 108 17875
450 400 374 19 32 x 5 5,2 x 108 22900
700 630 374 40 50 x 5 1,1 x 109 33750
1150 1000 374 40 2 x (50 x 5) 4,5 x 109 67500
800 700 374 41 63 x 5 1,8 x 109 42500
1350 1150 374 41 2 x (63 x 5) 7,2 x 109 85000
950 850 374 59 75 x 5 2,5 x 109 50600
1500 1300 374 59 2 x (75 x 5) 1 x 1010 101000
1000 900 374 43 80 x 5 2,9 x 109 54000
1650 1450 374 43 2 x (80 x 5) 1,2 x 1010 108000
1200 1050 374 46 100 x5 4,5 x 109 67500
1900 1600 374 46 2 x (100 x 5) 1,8 x 1010 135000

136
Rigid bars on supports Cat. Nos. 373 24 and 374 54

TECHNICAL PART
Rigid flat copper bars - edgewise mounting Rigid flat copper bars - edgewise mounting
le(A) IP30 Ithe(A) IP >30 Number Dimensions (mm) I2t (A2s) le(A) IP30 Ithe(A) IP >30 Number Dimensions (mm) I2t (A2s)
700 630 1 50 x 5 1.14 x 109 950 850 1 50 x 10 4.56 x 109
1180 1020 2 50 x 5 4.56 x 109 1680 1470 2 50 x 10 1.82 x 1010
1600 1380 3 50 x 5 1.03 x 1010 2300 2030 3 50 x 10 4.10 x 1010
2020 1720 4 50 x 5 1.82 x 1010 1150 1020 1 60 x 10 6.56 x 109
800 700 1 63 x 5 1.81 x 109 2030 1750 2 60 x 10 2.62 x 1010
1380 1180 2 63 x 5 7.23 x 109 2800 2400 3 60 x 10 5.90 x 1010
1900 1600 3 63 x 5 1.63 x 1010 1460 1270 1 80 x 10 1.17 x 1010
2350 1950 4 63 x 5 2.89 x 1010
2500 2150 2 80 x 10 4.67 x 1010
950 850 1 75 x 5 2.56 x 109
3450 2900 3 80 x 10 1.05 x 1011
1600 1400 2 75 x 5 1.03 x 1010
1750 1500 1 100 x 10 1.82 x 1010
2200 1900 3 75 x 5 2.31 x 1010
3050 2550 2 100 x 10 7.29 x 1010
2700 2300 4 75 x 5 4.10 x 1011
4150 3500 3 100 x 10 1.64 x 1011
1000 900 1 80 x 5 2.92 x 109
2000 1750 1 120 x 10 2.62 x 1010
1700 1480 2 80 x 5 1.17 x 1010
3600 2920 2 120 x 10 1.05 x 1011
2350 2000 3 80 x 5 2.62 x 1010
2850 2400 4 80 x 5 4.67 x 1010 4800 4000 3 120 x 10 2.36 x 1011
1200 1050 1 100 x 5 4.56 x 109
2050 1800 2 100 x 5 1.82 x 1010
2900 2450 3 100 x 5 4.10 x 1010
3500 2900 4 100 x 5 7.29 x 1010
1450 1270 1 125 x 5 7.12 x 109
2500 2150 2 125 x 5 2.85 x 1010
3450 2900 3 125 x 5 6.41 x 1010
4150 3450 4 125 x 5 1.14 x 1011
1750 1500 1 160 x 5(1) 1.17 x 1010
3050 2450 2 160 x 5(1) 4.67 x 1010 Positioning of the groups of bars
4200 3300 3 160 x 5(1) 1.05 x 1011
5000 3800 4 160 x 5(1) 1.87 x 1011
(1) needs stainless steel threaded assembly rod, diameter 8 ,
to be supplied separately and cut to length

Bars mounted
edgewise
on vertical busbars

or horizontal on supports
Cat. No. 374 54 in horizontal position
Supports Cat. Nos. 373 24 are used to create very high current
busbars: up to 4000 A in an enclosure

137
Distribution (continued)

BUSBARS (continued)

Rigid flat copper bars - flatwise mounting Rigid flat copper bars - flatwise mounting
le(A) IP 30 Ithe(A) IP >30 Number per pole Dimensions (mm) le(A) IP 30 Ithe(A) IP >30 Number per pole Dimensions (mm)
500 420 1 50 x 5 880 650 1 50 x 10
750 630 2 50 x 5 1250 1050 2 50 x 10
1000 900 3 50 x 5 2000 1600 3 50 x 10
1120 1000 4 50 x 5 1000 800 1 60 x 10
600 500 1 63 x 5 1600 1250 2 60 x 10
750 630 2 63 x 5 2250 1850 3 60 x 10
1100 1000 3 63 x 5 1150 950 1 80 x 10
1350 1200 4 63 x 5 1370 1650 2 80 x 10
700 600 1 75 x 5 2500 2000 3 80 x 10
1000 850 2 75 x 5 1350 1150 1 100 x 10
1250 1100 3 75 x 5 2000 1650 2 100 x 10
1600 1400 4 75 x 5 2900 2400 3 100 x 10
750 630 1 80 x 5
1650 1450 1 120 x 10
1050 900 2 80 x 5
1300 1150 3 80 x 5
1650 1450 4 80 x 5
850 700 1 100 x 5
1200 1050 2 100 x 5 Positioning of the groups of bars
1600 1400 3 100 x 5
1900 1650 4 100 x 5
1000 800 1 125 x 5 Bars mounted flatwise
1450 1250 2 125 x 5 in horizontal busbars on
1800 1600 3 125 x 5
2150 1950 4 125 x 5
supports Cat. No. 374 54
1150 900 1 160 x 5(1) in vertical position
1650 1450 2 160 x 5(1)
2000 1800 3 160 x 5(1)
2350 2150 4 160 x 5(1)
(1) needs stainless steel threaded assembly rod, diameter 8, to be supplied

separately and cut to length

Orientation of the bars


Positioning bars edgewise encourages heat
dissipation and is much the best option.
If the bars have to be positioned flatwise,
and therefore with the supports in a
vertical position, the permissible currents
must be reduced.

138
Supports Cat. No. 374 54

TECHNICAL PART
Simply rotate the isolating supports 1 to 4 bars, 5 mm thick, per pole 1 to 3 bars, 10 mm thick, per pole
to take 5 mm or 10 mm thick bars

It is also necessary to check that the permisible thermal stress per bar is higher than that limited by the protection
device.

DETERMINING THE DISTANCE Value of the peak current (Ipk)


BETWEEN THE SUPPORTS The limited peak current is determined from
The distance between the supports is determined the characteristics of the protection device.
according to the electrodynamic stress generated It represents the maximum (peak) value limited by
by the short-circuit. The forces exerted between this device. In the absence of a limiting protection
the bars during a short-circuit are proportional to device, the prospective peak value can be
the peak value of the short-circuit current. calculated from the prospective short-circuit
current and an asymmetry cœfficient.
Rms value of the prospective short-circuit
current (Ik)
Isc
This is the prospective maximum value
of the current which would circulate during a Prospective
short-circuit if there were no protection device. peak Isc
Prospective
It depends on the type and power of the supply. Isc
The actual short-circuit current will usually be Prospective
lower, given the impedance of the electrical rms Isc
trunking.
Limited
peak Isc
Limited Isc

139
Distribution (continued)

BUSBARS (continued)

Limiting protection device Non-limiting protection device

The limiting curves for the protection devices (DX


and DPX) give the limited peak current according to When the set of busbars is protected by a non-
the prospective short-circuit current. limiting device, the maximum value of the peak
The non-limited peak Isc curve corresponds to no current is developed during the first half-period of
protection. the short-circuit.

Value of Peak Isc


Peak asymmetrical
Isc first peak
sc
(kÂ) a kI
d pe
ite Rms
l im
N on value
Limitation
Limited curve of Isc
peak Isc
Time

Prospective Isc rms Isc (kA)

The table below gives the limited peak value (Ipk)


directly for the maximum prospective short-circuit
value equal to the breaking capacity (Icu) of the
device. For lower prospective short-circuit values, We then talk of an asymmetrical 1st peak.
read the curves to find an optimised value. The relationship between the peak value and the
rms value of the prospective short-circuit current
is defined by the asymmetry coefficient n:

Device Rating (A) Max. peak Isc (kÂ) peak Isc (Ipk) = n x prospective rms Isc
DPX 125 16-25 11.9
DPX 125 40-63 15
DPX 125 100-125 17 Prospective rms Isc (kA) n
DPX 160 25 14.3
≤5 1.5
DPX 160 40 to 160 20
DPX 250 ER 100 to 250 22 5 ≤ 1 = 10 1.7
DPX 250 40 to 250 27
10 ≤ 1 = 20 2
DPX-H 250 40 to 250 34
DPX 630 250 to 630 34 20 ≤ 1 = 50 2.1
DPX-H 630 250 to 630 42 50 < 1 2.2
DPX 1600 630 to 1600 85
DPX-H 1600 630 to 1600 110

140
Practical determination of the distances between
the supports according to the peak current (Ipk) The distance D’ after the last support

TECHNICAL PART
The tables appearing below can be used to must always be less than 30% of the distance D
determine the maximum distances D (in mm)
between the supports, and thus create sets of
busbars, based on the required Ipk value.
The shorter this distance D between the supports,
the higher the permissible Isc.

With single pole supports, it is also possible to


vary the spacing between the bars E (in mm). The D
greater the spacing between the bars, the higher
the permissible Isc.
D'

FOR MORE INFORMATION

See the on-line catalogue:


E instructions, technical data sheets, etc.

141
Distribution (continued)

Maximum distance “D” (in mm) for single pole supports (E adjustable)

Supports 373 98 Supports 374 37 Supports 373 10

374 33 (15 x 4) or 374 34 (18 x 4)


Bars 373 88 (12 x 2) or 373 89 (12 x 4) 374 34 (18 x 4) 374 18 (25 x 5) 374 19 (32 x 5)
or 374 38 (25 x 4)
E (mm) 50 75 100 125 50 75 100 125 55 83 55 83 55 83
Peak Isc 10 400 600 800 350 600 750 500 600 650 700
(Ipk in kA) 15 300 450 600 800 250 400 500 700 300 400 500 600 500 600
20 250 350 450 600 150 225 300 375 250 300 350 400 400 500
25 200 250 300 400 125 150 200 250 200 250 300 350 350 400
30 100 125 150 175 150 200 250 300 300 350
35 100 125 150
40 125 150 200 250 250 300
50 100 125 150 200 200 250
60 100 125 150 150 200
70 100 125 100 150
80 100 100

Maximum distance “D” (in mm) for multipole supports (E fixed)

Supports Supports 373 15

373 96 374 32 374 36


374 33/34
Bars 373 88 373 89 (15 x 4) 374 38 374 34 374 18 374 19
(12 x 2) (12 x 4) (18 x 4) (25 x 4) (18 x 4) (25 x 5) (32 x 5)
Peak Isc 10 200 400 550 650 1 000 1 200 1 500
(Ipk in kA) 15 150 300 400 500 700 1 000 1 200
20 125 200 300 400 550 750 950
25 100 150 200 350 400 600 750
30 150 200 350 500 650
35 100 150
40 100 250 350 450
50 200 300 400
60 200 250 300
70 150 200 250
80 150 200 250

142
Maximum distance “D” (in mm) for multipole supports Cat. Nos. 374 53

TECHNICAL PART
(E fixed: 75 mm)

Supports 373 22 and 374 53

1 bar per pole 2 bars per pole


Bars 374 40 374 41 374 59 374 43 374 46 374 40 374 41 374 59 374 43 374 46
(50 x 5) (63 x 5) (75 x 5) (80 x 5) (100 x 5) (50 x 5) (63 x 5) (75 x 5) (80 x 5) (100 x 5)
Peak Isc 10 1000 1200 1200 1200 1200
(Ipk in kÂ) 15 800 900 1000 1000 1200
20 650 700 750 750 900
25 500 600 600 600 700
30 400 500 550 550 600 700 800
35 350 450 450 450 550
40 300 350 400 400 450 550 600 650 650 700
45 300 300 350 350 400
50 250 250 300 300 350 450 500 500 500 550
60 200 250 250 250 300 350 400 400 400 450
70 150 200 250 250 250 250 350 350 350 400
80 100 150 200 200 200 250 300 300 300 300
90 100 150 200 200 200 200 250 300 300 300
100 100 150 150 150 150 200 200 250 250 250
110 100 100 150 150 150 200 150 200 200 200
120 100 100 100 100 100 150 150 200 200 200

Maximum distance “D” (in mm) for multipole supports Cat. Nos. 374 56 and 374 14
(E fixed: 75 mm)

Supports 373 21 Supports 373 20

1 C-section bar per pole 1 flat bar per pole 1 flat bar per pole
Bars 374 60 374 61 374 62 374 40 374 41 374 59 374 42 374 34 374 18 374 19 374 40 374 41
155 mm2 265 mm2 440 mm2 (50 x 5) (63 x 5) (75 x 5) (80 x 5) (18 x 4) (25 x 5) (32 x 5) (50 x 5) (63 x 5)
Peak Isc 10 1100 1600 1600 1100 1200 1200 1200 800 800 900
(Ipk in kÂ) 15 800 1000 1300 800 900 1000 1000 400 600 600 700 800
20 600 800 1000 650 700 750 750 300 450 500 600 700
25 450 650 800 500 600 800 800 250 350 400 500 550
30 400 550 700 400 500 550 550 225 300 350 400 450
35 350 450 600 350 450 450 450 200 250 300 350 400
40 300 400 550 300 350 400 400 175 200 250 275 300
45 300 350 500 300 300 350 350 150 200 200 225 250
50 250 300 450 250 250 300 300 150 150 150 200 200
60 200 300 400 200 250 250 250 125 125 125 150 150
70 150 250 350 150 200 200 200 100 100 100 150 150
80 200 300 100 150 200 200 100 100
90 200 250 100 150 200 200
100 150 250 100 150 150 150
110 150 200 100 100 150 150
120 150 200 100 100 100 100

143
Distribution (continued)

Maximum distance “D” (in mm) for multipole supports Cat. Nos. 373 24 and 374 54
with 5 mm thick copper bars

Supports Cat. Nos. 373 24


and 374 54
1 bar per pole 2 bars per pole
Bars 75 x 5 Bars 75 x 5
50 x 5 63 x 5 100 x 5 125 x 5 50 x 5 63 x 5 100 x 5 125 x 5
80 x 5 80 x 5
Peak Isc 10 1550 1700 1700 1700 1700 Peak Isc 10 1700 1700 1700 1700 1700
(Ipk in kÂ) 15 1050 1200 1350 1550 1700 (Ipk in kÂ) 15 1550 1700 1700 1700 1700
20 800 900 1000 1150 1350 20 1200 1350 1500 1700 1700
25 650 750 800 950 1100 25 950 1100 1200 1400 1550
30 550 600 700 800 900 30 800 900 1000 1150 1300
35 450 550 600 650 800 35 700 800 900 1000 1150
40 400 450 550 600 700 40 600 700 800 900 1000
45 350 400 450 550 600 45 550 600 700 800 900
50 350 350 450 500 550 50 500 550 650 700 800
60 300 300 350 400 450 60 400 450 550 600 700
70 250 250 300 350 400 70 350 400 450 500 650
80 250 250 300 350 80 300 350 400 450 550
90 250 250 300 90 300 300 350 400 500
100 250 300 100 250 300 300 350 500
110 250 250 110 250 250 300 350 450
120 250 120 250 250 300 450
130 250 130 250 300 400
140 140 250 250 400
150 150 250 350
160 160 250 350
170 170 350
180 180 300

3 bars per pole 4 bars per pole


Bars 75 x 5 Bars 75 x 5
50 x 5 63 x 5 100 x 5 125 x 5 50 x 5 63 x 5 100 x 5 125 x 5
80 x 5 80 x 5
Peak Isc 10 1700 1700 1700 1700 1700 Peak Isc 10 1700 1700 1700 1700 1700
(Ipk in kÂ) 15 1700 1700 1700 1700 1700 (Ipk in kÂ) 15 1700 1700 1700 1700 1700
20 1550 1700 1700 1700 1700 20 1700 1700 1700 1700 1700
25 1250 1450 1600 1700 1700 25 1550 1700 1700 1700 1700
30 1050 1200 1350 1550 1700 30 1300 1500 1700 1700 1700
35 900 1050 1150 1300 1500 35 1150 1250 1450 1650 1700
40 800 900 1050 1150 1300 40 1000 1100 1300 1450 1650
45 700 800 900 1050 1200 45 900 1000 1150 1300 1450
50 650 750 850 950 1050 50 800 900 1050 1150 1350
60 550 600 700 800 900 60 650 750 850 1000 1100
70 450 550 600 700 750 70 600 650 750 850 950
80 400 450 550 600 700 80 500 600 650 750 850
90 350 400 500 550 600 90 450 500 600 650 750
100 350 400 450 500 550 100 400 450 550 600 700
110 300 350 400 450 500 110 350 450 500 550 600
120 300 300 350 400 450 120 350 400 450 550 550
130 250 300 350 350 450 130 300 350 400 500 550
140 250 250 300 350 400 140 300 350 400 450 500
150 250 250 300 350 350 150 300 300 350 400 450
160 250 250 300 350 160 250 300 350 400 350
170 250 250 300 350 170 250 300 300 350 300
180 250 300 300 180 250 250 300 350 300
190 250 250 300 190 250 250 300 300 250
200 250 300 200 250 250 300 250
210 250 250 210 250 250 250 200
220 250 250 220 250 250 200

144
Maximum distance “D” (in mm) for multipole supports Cat. Nos. 373 24 and 374 54

TECHNICAL PART
with 10 mm thick copper bars

Bars
1 bar per pole
80 x 10 100 x10 120 x 10
20 1700 1700 1700
Peak Isc
(Ipk in kÂ) 25 1600 1700 1700
30 1350 1550 1700
35 1150 1300 1450
40 1050 1150 1300
45 900 1050 1150
50 850 950 1050
60 700 800 850
70 600 700 750
80 550 600 650
90 500 550 600
100 450 500 550
110 400 450 500
120 350 400 450
Supports Cat. Nos. 373 24 130 350 350 400
140 300 350 400
and 374 54 150 300 350 350
160 250 300 350
170 250 300 300
180 250 300 300
190 250 250 300
200 200 250 300
210 200 250 250
220 250 250
230 200 250
240 200
250 200

2 bars per pole 3 bars per pole


Bars Bars
80 x 10 100 x 10 120 x 10 80 x 10 100 x 10 120 x 10
Peak Isc 20 1700 1700 1700 Peak Isc 20 1700 1700 1700
(Ipk in kÂ) 25 1700 1700 1700 (Ipk in kÂ) 25 1700 1700 1700
30 1700 1700 1700 30 1700 1700 1700
35 1700 1700 1700 35 1700 1700 1700
40 1500 1700 1700 40 1700 1700 1700
45 1350 1550 1700 45 1700 1700 1700
50 1200 1400 1550 50 1600 1700 1700
60 1000 1150 1300 60 1350 1550 1700
70 900 1000 1100 70 1150 1300 1500
80 750 900 1000 80 1000 1150 1300
90 700 800 900 90 900 1050 1100
100 600 700 800 100 850 900 950
110 550 650 750 110 750 800 800
120 550 600 650 120 700 750 750
130 500 550 600 130 650 700 700
140 450 500 600 140 600 650 650
150 450 500 550 150 550 650 600
160 400 450 500 160 550 600 500
170 350 450 500 170 500 500 500
180 350 400 450 180 500 450 450
190 350 400 450 190 450 400 400
200 300 350 400 200 450 400 400
210 300 350 350 210 400 350 350
220 300 350 300 220 350 300 300
230 300 300 300 230 300 300 300
240 250 300 250 240 300 250 250
250 250 300 250 250 250 250 250

145
Distribution (continued)

BUSBARS (continued)

CHECKING THE INSULATION


CHARACTERISTICS
Insulation voltage Ui Impulse withstand voltage Uimp
This must be the same as or higher than the This value characterises the permissible
maximum value of the rated operating voltage for overvoltage level in the form of a voltage wave
the assembly, or the reference voltage. representative of a lightning strike.
The latter depends on the mains supply voltage Its value (in kV) depends on the mains voltage, but
and the structure of the supply (star, delta, with or also on where it is placed in the installation.
without neutral). It is highest at the installation source.

Insulation characteristics for busbar supports (Degree of pollution 3)

Cat. No. 373 98 374 37 373 96 374 32 374 36 373 10 374 14 374 53 373 21 374 54
Ui (V) 500 500 690 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
Uimp (kV) 8 8 8 12 12 12 12 12 12 12

All the recommendations relating to Legrand busbar supports are designed


insulation are defined by international and tested for the harshest operating
standard IEC 60664-1 “Insulation conditions corresponding to the highest
coordination in low-voltage systems overvoltage risks. The value Uimp
(networks)”. They are also found in characterises this safety requirement.
standards IEC 60439-1 and IEC 60947-1.

146
MAGNETIC EFFECTS ASSOCIATED WITH BUSBARS

TECHNICAL PART
The magnetic effects associated with busbars can - 50 cm for devices with limited sensitivity
be separated into transient effects, which are the (secondary MCBs, including RCDs, relays,
short-circuit electrodynamic forces, and contactors, transformers, etc)
permanent effects created by induction due to - 1 m for sensitive devices (electronics and digital
circulation of high currents. The effects of metering equipment, systems with a bus, remote
induction have several consequences. controls, electronic switches, etc)
- Devices which are very sensitive to magnetic
• Increased impedance in the conductors due to fields (analogue gauge, meters, oscillographs,
the effects of mutual inductance cathode ray tubes, etc) may require greater
separation distances.

Supports on aluminium crosspieces to


• Temperature rise linked to magnetic saturation prevent the formation of a magnetic field.
of materials in the field around the conductors

• Possible interference in sensitive devices for


which minimum recommended cohabitation
distances must be observed.

Non-magnetic stainless steel screws


have the same function on supports
Cat. No. 374 54.

If very high power busbars are being used and


there are no manufacturer instructions, the
minimum distances should be increased to:
- 30 cm for devices with very little sensitivity
(fuses, non residual current devices, connections,
MCCBs, etc)

147
Distribution (continued)

THE XL-PART SYSTEM

Capable of supplying and


distributing power up to 1600 A,
XL-Part column chassis and active backplate
XL-Part concentrates functions, XL-Part C-section columns are used to distribute
the current directly to the DPX support bases:
multiplies innovations and is
this solution divides the connection points by two
undoubtedly the most
and optimises the use of space in the enclosure.
homogenous solution for
distributing power in industry
and commercial situations.
A simple yet effective solution Power supply unit
which optimises the quality Direct or indirect, from the top or the bottom…
and speed of installation. with the XL-Part column chassis, the power supply
can be used in any configuration
for connecting conductors.

Support bases for DPX


The new XL-Part bases are used both to
distribute current and fix MCCBs.
With plug-in and draw-out versions,
connection of the outputs (or inputs)
is made by the base itself.

Row distribution blocks 400 and 250 A


Fully complementary to C-section columns,
XL-Part row distribution blocks are used
to supply and distribute power up to 400 A,
with bases designed to take and associate
DPX, DX and Lexic wiring accessories.

148
N L1
L2 L
3

TECHNICAL PART
L3
L2
L1
N

149
Distribution (continued)

DISTRIBUTION BLOCKS

The distribution block is a prefabricated device. Permissible short-circuit value


It is therefore sized to suit its rated current and, • The value Icw characterises the conventional
unlike sets of busbars, does not require permissible current for 1 s from the point of view
manufacturing definitions. of thermal stress.
In contrast, the diversity of distribution blocks • The value Ipk characterises the maximum
according to their capacity, their connection mode permissible peak current for the distribution
and their installation calls for careful selection block.
while adhering to precise standards-based rules. This value must be higher than that limited by the
Phase balancing is also done at distribution level. upstream protection device for the prospective
The Legrand range of distribution blocks, both vast short-circuit.
and diverse, can satisfy any requirement.

CHARACTERISTICS OF Legrand distribution blocks are designed to


DISTRIBUTION BLOCKS have resistance to thermal stress at least as
With universality as their watchword, distribution high as that of the conductor on the cross-
blocks are suitable for all types of application. section corresponding to the nominal
current, which means that no other checks
Rated current are usually necessary.
Often called nominal current (In), this should be
chosen according to the current of the upstream
device or the power supply conductor cross- Insulation value
section. As a general rule, use a distribution
Legrand distribution blocks are designed and
block with the same current as or immediately
tested for the harshest operating conditions
above that of the main device (It), ensuring that
corresponding to the highest overvoltage risks.
the sum of the distributed circuit currents is not
The value Uimp characterises this safety
higher than the nominal current (In)
requirement.
of the distribution block.

It Insulation values for Legrand distribution blocks

Term.
blocks Lexiclic Modular Extra-plats
Type distribution distribution Stepped distribution blocks
40/100 A
IP 2 x blocks blocks
048 79/80/ 374 42
048 70/ 374 30/31 370 08
Cat. No. 048 XX 81/82/83/84/ 374 47 374 00 spacing
74/75 374 35
85/86/88 50 mm 75 mm
Ui (V) 400 660 500 500 1000 1000 1000 1500 1000
I1 I2 I3 I4
Uimp (kV) 8 8 8 8 12 12 8 12 12
or

150
TECHNICAL PART
Connection method The various distribution blocks
Direct connection
It is the actual installation and previously
The conductors are directly connected in the described characteristics: rated current, withstand
terminals without any special preparation. to short-circuits, insulation values, number and
Use of a ferrule (such as StarfixTM) is capacities of outputs, connection method, that
recommended for the flexible conductors allow you to determine the most suitable choice
connected in butt terminals and for external of distribution block.
flexible cables which may be subject to pulling.

Connection via terminals


Type of connection normally used for conductors
with a large cross-section.
It is characterised by excellent mechanical
withstand, excellent electrical reliability and its
ease of connection/disconnection.

Possible installations for distribution blocks

Distribution Upstream Upstream


block Upstream device device
Distribution
device block
Distribution
Distribution Downstream Distribution block
Device block device block
Downstream
device

Distribution Downstream
block device

At the supply end or Directly on the Directly on the Independently Directly on the output
on the panel output output of an input of of the upstream and of the upstream device
for connecting upstream device downstream downstream devices and on the input
incoming or outgoing (output terminal) devices (supply with the need to of downstream devices,
conductors busbar, Lexiclic) connect the input with no wiring
(connection box) and outputs and incorporating
the actual device fixing
mechanisms. It is the
most successful concept:
XL-Part

151
Distribution (continued)

DISTRIBUTION BLOCKS (continued)

Lexic supply busbars XL-Part row distribution blocks


1, 2, 3 or 4-pole supply busbars are used, by direct Active supports used for supplying and distributing
connection, to supply power to Lexic modular power in rows up to 400 A.
devices up to 90 A.
They represent a flexible solution, which takes up
very little space and can be adapted to provide
distribution in rows.

Possibility of direct and


indirect power supply
Possibility of adding supply
busbars on top of or
underneath Lexic devices
Distribution terminals
to suit all local customs
These single pole distribution blocks are fixed
directly in the output terminals of devices DPX
Independent distribution terminal blocks 125, 160, 250 ER, 250, DPX-IS 250 and modular
Vistop from 63 to 160 A.
Totally universal in their application, this type of They are used for direct, simplified distribution
terminal block can be used to distribute up to 100 A for panels where the number of main circuits is
on between 4 and 33 outputs depending on the limited.
catalogue number. The incoming cross-section is
between 4 and 25 mm2, and that of the outputs
between 4 and 16 mm2. These terminal blocks are
fixed on a flat 12 x 2 bar or on a 3 rail.

6 outputs 35 mm2 rigid


(25 mm2 flexible)
for the output terminal
Cat. No. 048 67

By associating IP 2x terminal blocks with a support Cat. No. 048 10,


you can create a 2P, 3P or 4P distribution block

152
TECHNICAL PART
Modular distribution blocks Stepped distribution blocks
These combine compactness and high connection These exist in a catalogue version, complete and
capacity. They are fixed by clipping onto fully-assembled from 125 to 400 A and in their
TH 35-15 rails. Legrand modular distribution modular version (bars and supports to be ordered
blocks are totally isolated: they are used separately) can be used to create customised
at the supply end of the panel up to 250 A or distribution.
in subgroups of outputs in panels with a higher
power rating.

Distribution block 250 A


(Cat. No. 374 35)
Modular distribution block 160 A 2-pole distribution
Cat. No. 048 87 total isolation block equipped with
of each pole an additional terminal Connection boxes
block Designed to form the interface
between the large cross-section
conductors coming into the panel,
Extra-flat distribution blocks including some in aluminium,
and the internal wiring conductors.
Their shorter dimensions and their permissible
Two models
currents means that the same panel can manage
- 120 mm2/70 mm2 (Cat. No. 374 80)
the power requirements for the supply end (up to
- 300 mm2/185 mm2 (Cat. No. 374 81)
250 A) combined with the compactness of
are available.
modular rows in slim panels.
They can also be used for operating
circuits (outputs) in aluminium or
when the line lengths make large
cross-sections compulsory.

Power, capacity to connect


to cables with large
cross-sections and
compactness are the key
benefits of extra-flat
distribution blocks
153
3
XL
enclosures

More than just an extensive offer,


XL3 (new system of wall-mounting,
floor-standing enclosures and
distribution equipment), brings
you freedom to create your
assemblies: choose your
distribution equipment,
the finish and how you work.

Find the complete offer


on page 248

154
THE XL3 RANGE

TECHNICAL PART
This range offers you total freedom when choosing your solutions.
It consists of “ready to use” wall-mounting and floor-standing
extendable enclosures.

XL3 160 enclosures


XL3 160 enclosures are delivered “ready to use”.
They enable any configuration to be created, with or without
a connection panel. They are easy to connect and are ideal for
all installations (surface mounting and flush mounting solutions).
XL3 160 enclosures, capacity 24 modules, are available
in 3 versions:
› metal
› class II insulated
› flush mounting

XL3 400 wall-mounting and floor-standing enclosures


These are fully extendable. They provide strong housing
for distribution assemblies, and their ingenious innovations
(functional uprights, 2-position rails) make them easy to install.
XL3 400 enclosures have capacity for 24 modules and are supplied
with side panels, roof, base, and functional uprights, etc
Wall-mounting enclosures are available in 3 versions:
› metal
› class II insulated
› IP 55 metal
Floor-standing enclosures are supplied with a plinth and are available in:
› metal IP 43 and IP 55

XL3 800 wall-mounting and floor-standing enclosures


The XL3 800 range provides extendable modular solutions up
to 800 A. It provides strong housing for distribution assemblies.
The modular solution enables partial doors to be fitted.
XL3 800 wall-mounting and floor-standing enclosures have:
› capacity for 24 or 36 modules per row
› heights 1050 to 1950 mm which take or are associated
with cable sleeves.

155
XL3
enclosures

FREEDOM TO DISTRIBUTE HOW YOU WISH FREEDOM TO CHOOSE THE FINISH

The new XL3 range allows you to choose the type Faceplates
of distribution you want: 1/4 turn closing with sealable handle for XL3 160 to
800 wall-mounting and floor-standing enclosures.
“Standard” distribution
This is made up of:
- busbar supports
- distribution blocks
- terminal blocks
- supply busbars

Screw-mounting and hinged faceplates for XL3


XL-Part “optimised” distribution enclosures.
These are made up of:
- a column chassis Doors
- active backplates
Flat doors:
- row distribution blocks
- automatic distribution
All metal Glass
using supply busbars

Curved doors:

All metal Glass

156
FREEDOM TO CHOOSE HOW YOU WORK Legrand advantages

TECHNICAL PART
The XL3 range is perfectly integrated
The new XL3 range allows you complete freedom
in putting the equipment together, due to its total
1 in the XL PRO2 design software

accessibility.
Choice of solutions up to 800 A:
Removable side panels/draw-out chassis. 2 wall-mounting and floor-standing enclosures,
distribution, finish

3 The freedom to organise your own assemblies

FOR MORE INFORMATION


Other electronic protection units
on request

157
XL3 160
enclosures

CHARACTERISTICS

XL3 160 enclosures have been Insulated Metal Flush


designed to simplify wiring and enclosure enclosure mounting
connection. They are all equipped class II O class I enclosure
with a removable chassis and Short-circuit resistance Ipk 20 k 35 kÂ
also offer original solutions for without door IP 30
holding and running the wiring, Protection
a large working space and with door IP 40
index
a high-quality finish. with door and seal IP 43
They can take devices up Conformity with standards IEC 60439-1 and 60439-3
to 160 A.
Fireproof according to IEC 60695-2-1 750 °C/5 s
They are supplied complete
with rails, faceplates, and a brass Colour RAL 7035
bar for protective conductors.

XL3 160 insulated enclosure:


- side panels can be removed separately
- frame can be dismantled
- removable chassis

158
CLASS II INSULATED ENCLOSURES

TECHNICAL PART
Enclosure with dedicated
“Fully modular” enclosures space for DPX 160

1050
900
External
height 750
(mm) 600
450

Cat. No. 200 52 200 53 200 54 200 55 200 56 200 95 200 96

Modular capacity 2 rows 3 rows 4 rows 5 rows 6 rows 3 rows 4 rows


Modules 48 72 96 120 144 72 96

solid 202 52 202 53 202 54 202 55 202 56 202 55 202 56


Curved
door
glass 202 62 202 63 202 64 202 65 202 66 202 65 202 66

solid 202 72 202 73 202 74 202 75 202 76 202 75 202 76


Flat
door
glass 202 82 202 83 202 84 202 85 202 86 202 85 202 86

Fully modular enclosures can take the DPX 125 and the Vistop 160 with no accessory.

159
XL3 160
enclosures (continued)

METAL ENCLOSURES

1050
900
External
height 750
(mm) 600
450

Cat. No. 200 02 200 03 200 04 200 05 200 06

Modular capacity 2 rows 3 rows 4 rows 5 rows 6 rows


Modules 48 72 96 120 144

202 52 202 53 202 54 202 55 202 56


solid
Curved
door
glass 202 62 202 63 202 64 202 65 202 66

202 72 202 73 202 74 202 75 202 76


solid
Flat
door

glass 202 82 202 83 202 84 202 85 202 86

Metal enclosures can take the DPX 125 and the Vistop 160 with no accessory.

160
FLUSH MOUNTING ENCLOSURES

TECHNICAL PART
Enclosure with dedicated
“Fully modular” enclosures
space for DPX 160

1050
External 900
height 750
(mm) 600

Cat. No. 200 13 200 14 200 15 200 16 200 25 200 26

Modular capacity 3 rows 4 rows 5 rows 6 rows 3 rows 4 rows


Modules 72 96 120 144 72 96

solid 202 73 202 74 202 75 202 76 202 75 202 76


Flat
door
glass 202 83 202 84 202 85 202 86 202 85 202 86

Fully modular enclosures can take the DPX 125 and the Vistop 160 with no accessory.

161
XL3 400
enclosures

CHARACTERISTICS

XL3 400 can be used to create customised


enclosures for all your environments.
- IP 30 to IP 55
- IK 04 to IK 08
- Class I and class II
- Fire resistance: 750°/5 s (IEC 60695-2) for installation
in public buildings
- Short time withstand current Icw: 25 kA 1 s
- 24 modules per row
- Take devices up to 400 A
- Choice of distribution: standard or optimised
(XL-Part 250 active backplate, row distribution block
250 A, etc)
- Joinable (left and/or right) and extendable cable
sleeves: Lexic, DPX and distribution devices
- Colour: RAL 7035
- Conform to IEC 60439-1

162
IP 30-40-43 METAL WALL-MOUNTING AND FLOOR-STANDING

TECHNICAL PART
Depth: 175 mm - External width: 575 mm
Floor-standing
Wall-mounting enclosures enclosures

1900

1600
1500

External 1200
height 1050
(mm) 900
750
600

Cat. No. 201 03 201 04 201 05 201 06 201 07 201 08 201 18 201 19
Height with 550 700 850 1 000 1 150 1 450 1 450 1 750
faceplate (mm)

solid 202 53 202 54 202 55 202 56 202 57 202 58 202 58 202 59


Curved
door
glass 202 63 202 64 202 65 202 66 202 67 202 68 202 68 202 69

solid 202 73 202 74 202 75 202 76 202 77 202 78 202 78 202 79


Flat
door
glass 202 83 202 84 202 85 202 86 202 87 202 88 202 88 202 89

201 23 201 24 201 25 201 26 201 27 201 28 201 38 201 39


Cable sleeve

Solid door 201 63 201 64 201 65 201 66 201 67 201 68 201 68 201 69
for cable
sleeve

163
XL3 400
enclosures (continued)

IP 30-40-43 INSULATED ENCLOSURES


Depth: 175 mm - External width: 575 mm

1200
1050
External
height 900
(mm) 750
600

Cat. No. 201 53 201 54 201 55 201 56 201 57


Height with 550 700 850 1 000 1 150
faceplate
(mm)
solid 202 53 202 54 202 55 202 56 202 57
Curved
door
glass 202 63 202 64 202 65 202 66 202 67

solid 202 73 202 74 202 75 202 76 202 77


Flat
door
glass 202 83 202 84 202 85 202 86 202 87

201 73 201 74 201 75 201 76 201 77


Cable sleeve
Solid door
for cable 201 63 201 64 201 65 201 66 201 67
sleeve

164
ONE-PIECE IP 55 ENCLOSURES

TECHNICAL PART
Depth: 215 mm - External width: 650 mm

1115
External 915
height 715
(mm)
515

Cat. No. 201 82 201 83 201 84 201 85


Height with 400 600 800 1000
faceplate (mm)

Metal floor-standing enclosure Metal wall-mounting


and cable sleeve enclosure

165
XL3 800
enclosures

CHARACTERISTICS

XL3 800 can be used to create customised


enclosures for all your environments.
- IP 30 to IP 55
- IK 07 to IK 08
- Fire resistance: 750°/5 s (IEC 60695-2) for
installation in public buildings
- Short time withstand current Icw: 25 kA 1 s
- Max. short-circuit current Ipk: 50 kÂ
- 24 or 36 modules per row
- Take devices up to 800 A
(630 A for IP 55)
- Choice of distribution: standard or optimised
- Internal or external cable sleeves (joinable on left
and/or right), extendable (DPX and distribution)
- Colour: RAL 7035
- Conform to standard IEC 60439-1

166
IP 30-40-43 WALL-MOUNTING AND FLOOR-STANDING ENCLOSURES

TECHNICAL PART
Wall-mounting enclosures Floor-standing enclosures

1950

1550
External
height
(mm) 1250
1050

Cat. No. 204 01 204 06 204 02 204 07 204 03 204 08 204 04 204 09
Total width (mm) 660 910 660 910 660 910 660 910
Capacity per
row (modules)
24 36(1) 24 36(1) 24 36(1) 24 36(1)
Height with faceplate (mm) 1000 1000 1200 1200 1400 1400 1800 1800

metal 212 51 212 56 212 52 212 57 212 53 212 58 212 54 212 59


Curved
doors
glass 212 61 212 66 212 62 212 67 212 63 212 68 212 64 212 69

Internal cable sleeve kit 204 26 204 27 204 28 204 29

Faceplate for internal cable sleeve 204 46 204 47 204 48 204 49


External cable sleeve 204 23 204 23 204 24 204 24

Door for external cable sleeve 204 33 204 33 204 34 204 34

Faceplate for external cable sleeve 204 43 204 43 204 44 204 44


IP 43 kit 201 30 201 30 201 30 201 30 201 30 201 30 201 30 201 30
Partitioning divider 204 90 204 91 204 90 204 91 204 90 204 91 204 90 204 91

(1) or 24 modules if internal cable sleeve

167
XL3 800
enclosures (continued)

IP 55 WALL-MOUNTING AND FLOOR-STANDING ENCLOSURES

Wall-mounting enclosures Floor-standing enclosures

1995

1595
External
height
1295
(mm)
1095

Cat. No. 204 51 204 56 204 52 204 57 204 53 204 58 204 54 204 59
Total width (mm) 700 950 700 950 700 950 700 950
Capacity per row (modules) 24 36(1) 24 36(1) 24(1) 36(1) 24 36(1)
Height with faceplate 1000 1000 1200 1200 1400 1400 1800 1800

metal 212 71 212 76 212 72 212 77 212 73 212 78 212 74 212 79


Flat
doors
glass 212 81 212 86 212 82 212 87 212 83 212 88 212 84 212 89

Internal cable sleeve kit 204 76 204 77 204 78 204 79


Faceplate for external cable sleeve 204 46 204 47 204 48 204 49
External cable sleeve 204 73 204 73 204 74 204 74
Door for external cable sleeve 204 83 204 83 204 84 204 84

Faceplate for external cable sleeve 204 43 204 43 204 44 204 44


Partitioning divider 204 90 204 91 204 90 204 91 204 90 204 91 204 90 204 91
Side panels 204 66 204 66 204 67 204 67 204 68 204 68 204 69 204 69

(1) or 24 modules if internal cable sleeve

168
MODULAR ENCLOSURES (24 MODULES)

TECHNICAL PART
Complete enclosure = Backpiece + roof + + Side panel + +
width 660 mm base + plinth assembly Side panels Curved doors
support
External height (mm)
Heights with faceplate (mm)

204 15 Metal 212 49


600

Glass 212 39
1550

800

204 13 204 19 204 16 Metal 212 50


Glass 212 60

204 15 Metal 212 49


600

Glass 212 39
1950

204 14 204 19 204 18 Metal 212 52


1200

Glass 212 62
800

204 16 Metal 212 50


1950

Glass 212 60
1000

204 14 204 19 204 17 Metal 212 51


Glass 212 61
600

Metal 3 x 212 49
1950

600

204 14 2 x 204 19 3 x 204 15 Glass 3 x 212 39


600

169
The
Legrand
offer

170
NEW
DMX-E 55 DMX-E 65
air circuit breakers air circuit breakers

6260 05 6260 75

Electrical characteristics (p. 30 and p. 31) Electrical characteristics (p. 30 and p. 31)
Dimensions (p. 32) Dimensions (p. 33 and p. 34)

Air circuit breakers equipped with: Air circuit breakers equipped with:
- MP 2G electronic protection unit - MP 2G electronic protection unit
- rear terminals - rear terminals
- 8 auxiliary contacts (4 NO + 4 NC) - 8 auxiliary contacts (4 NO + 4 NC)
Breaking capacity Icu 55 kA (415 V ) ± Breaking capacity Icu 65 kA (415 V ) ±
Pack Cat.Nos Pack Cat.Nos

Fixed version Fixed version


3P 4P In 3P 4P In
1 6260 02 6260 12 800 A 1 6260 42 6260 52 800 A
1 6260 03 6260 13 1 000 A 1 6260 43 6260 53 1 000 A
1 6260 04 6260 14 1 250 A 1 6260 44 6260 54 1 250 A
1 6260 05 6260 15 1 600 A 1 6260 45 6260 55 1 600 A
Draw-out version 1 6260 46 6260 56 2 000 A
Supplied with a base equipped with 1 6260 47 6260 57 2 500 A
adjustable rear terminals and
independently lockable safety shutters Draw-out version
Supplied with a base equipped with
In adjustable rear terminals and
1 6260 22 6260 32 800 A independently lockable safety shutters
1 6260 23 6260 33 1 000 A In
1 6260 24 6260 34 1 250 A 1 6260 62 6260 72 800 A
1 6260 25 6260 35 1 600 A 1 6260 63 6260 73 1 000 A
1 6260 64 6260 74 1 250 A
1 6260 65 6260 75 1 600 A
1 6260 66 6260 76 2 000 A
1 6260 67 6260 77 2 500 A

Red catalogue numbers: New products

171
NEW
DMX-E 80 DMX-E 100
air circuit breakers air circuit breakers

6261 17 6261 29

Electrical characteristics (p. 30 and p. 31) Electrical characteristics (p. 30 and p. 31)
Dimensions (p. 33 and p. 34) Dimensions (p. 34)

Air circuit breakers equipped with: Air circuit breakers equipped with:
- MP 2G electronic protection unit - MP 2G electronic protection unit
- rear terminals - rear terminals
- 8 auxiliary contacts (4 NO + 4 NC) - 8 auxiliary contacts (4 NO + 4 NC)
Breaking capacity Icu 80 kA (415 V ) ± Breaking capacity Icu 100 kA (415 V ±)
Pack Cat.Nos Pack Cat.Nos

Fixed version Fixed version


3P 4P In 3P 4P In
1 6260 86 6260 96 2 000 A 1 6261 26 6261 36 2 000 A
1 6260 87 6260 97 2 500 A 1 6261 27 6261 37 2 500 A
1 6260 88 6260 98 3 200 A 1 6261 28 6261 38 3 200 A
1 6260 89 6260 99 4 000 A 1 6261 29 6261 39 4 000 A
Draw-out version Draw-out version
Supplied with a base equipped with Supplied with a base equipped with
adjustable rear terminals and adjustable rear terminals (except 2 000
independently lockable safety shutters and 2 500 A) and independently lockable
In safety shutters
1 6261 06 6261 16 2 000 A In
1 6261 07 6261 17 2 500 A 1 6261 46 6261 56 2 000 A
1 6261 08 6261 18 3 200 A 1 6261 47 6261 57 2 500 A
1 6261 09 6261 19 4 000 A 1 6261 48 6261 58 3 200 A
1 6261 49 6261 59 4 000 A

Red catalogue numbers: New products

172
NEW
DMX-E DMX-EI
electronic protection unit trip-free switches

6263 79 MP 3 available 6262 05


on request

Technical characteristics (p. 30 and p. 31) Electrical characteristics (p. 30 and p. 31)
Dimensions (p. 32 to p. 34)

The circuit breakers are delivered with their protection unit MP 2G Non automatic air circuit breakers with rear terminals and 8 auxiliary
contacts (4 NO + 4 NF)
Suitable for isolation
Pack Cat.Nos

MP 2G electronic protection unit Pack Cat.Nos


On standard, the DMX-E are equipped with an
MP 2G electronic protection unit, with rotary Fixed version
selectors for adjustment of the operating parameters 3P 4P In
(p. 43) 1 6262 01 6262 11 630 A
Adjustment of neutral protection: 0, 50 or 100 %
1 6262 02 6262 12 800 A
I 1 6262 03 6262 13 1 000 A
lr 1 6262 04 6262 14 1 250 A
Tr 1 6262 05 6262 15 1 600 A
1 6262 06 6262 16 2 000 A
ls
Ts 1 6262 07 6262 17 2 500 A
lg lp 1 6262 08 6262 18 3 200 A
Tg
t 1 6262 09 6262 19 4 000 A
Draw-out version
Other versions on request Supplied with a base equipped with
adjustable rear terminals (except 2 000
Test box and 2 500 A) and independently lockable
1 6263 79 Use to verify the correct functioning of the protection safety shutters
unit and the opening conditions In
MP 3 electronic protection unit 1 6262 21 6262 31 630 A
On request, the DMX-E can be equipped with an 1 6262 22 6262 32 800 A
MP 3 electronic protection unit provided with a
liquid crystal display high resolution, additional 1 6262 23 6262 33 1 000 A
protections, functions of measurement and 1 6262 24 6262 34 1 250 A
communication 1 6262 25 6262 35 1 600 A
1 6262 26 6262 36 2 000 A
1 6262 27 6262 37 2 500 A
1 6262 28 6262 38 3 200 A
1 6262 29 6262 39 4 000 A

Red catalogue numbers: New products

173
NEW
DMX-E
control and signalling auxiliaries and locking options

6262 64 6262 95 6263 04

Pack Cat.Nos Control and signalling auxiliaries Pack Cat.Nos Control and signalling auxiliaries (continued)
Shunt releases Closing releases
Trip the breaker from a remote location when Enables remote closing of the circuit breaker if the
energized closing spring is charged
1 6262 60 =
24/30 V 1 6263 00 =
24/30 V
1 6262 62 ±
110 V - 50/60 Hz - 110 V = 1 6263 01 =
48/60 V
1 6262 64 ±
220/240 V - 50/60 Hz - 220/250 V = 1 6263 02 ±
110 V - 50/60 Hz - 110 V =
1 6262 65 ± ±
415 V - 50 Hz - 380/415 V - 60 Hz 1 6263 04 ± ±
240 V - 50 Hz - 220/240 V - 60 Hz - 220/250 V =
Undervoltage releases 1 6263 05 ± ±
415 V - 50 Hz - 380/415 V - 60 Hz
Trip the breaker from a remote location when its Signalling contacts
voltage drops 1 6263 11 Position signal contact
1 6262 70 =
24/30 V 1 6263 17 Fault signal contact
1 6262 71 48 V= 1 6263 18 True "ready to close" contact
1 6262 72 ±
110 V - 50 Hz 1 6263 15 Shunt release action signal contact
1 6262 73 ±
110 V - 60 Hz 1 6263 16 Undervoltage release action signal contact
1 6262 74 110 V=
1 6262 77 ±
240 V - 50 Hz
1 6262 78 ±
240 V - 60 Hz Locking options
1 6262 79 ±
380/415 V - 50 Hz Key locking in "open" position
1 6262 80 ±
380/415 V - 60 Hz For lock (not supplied)
Delayed undervoltage releases 1 6263 40 Ronis
Trip the breaker from a remote location after a time 1 6263 41 Profalux
delay when its voltage drops
1 6263 42 Castell
1 6262 81 48 V= 1 6263 43 Kirk
1 6262 82 ±
110 V - 50 Hz
Key locking in "drawn-out" position
1 6262 83 ±
110 V - 60 Hz
1 or 2 locks for one DMX-E for lock (not supplied)
1 6262 84 110 V= 1 6263 45 Ronis
1 6262 87 ±
240 V - 50 Hz
1 6263 46 Profalux
1 6262 88 ±
240 V - 60 Hz
1 6263 47 Castell
1 6262 89 ±
380/415 V - 50 Hz
1 6263 48 Kirk
1 6262 90 ±
380/415 V - 60 Hz
Door locking
Motor operators Prevents opening of the door with the circuit
To motorise a DMX-E, it is necessary to attach to the breaker closed
motor operator, a release coil (undervoltage or shunt For left or right hand side mounting door
release) and a closing release
1 6263 22 Door locking
1 6262 91 =
24/30 V
1 6262 92 =
48/60 V
1 6262 93 ±
110 V - 50/60 Hz - 110/125 V =
1 6262 95 ±
240 V - 50/60 Hz - 250 V =
1 6262 96 ±
380/415 V - 50/60 Hz - 400 V =

For other voltage, please consult us

Red catalogue numbers: New products

174
NEW
DMX-E
equipment and accessories

6263 87

Pack Cat.Nos Equipment for supply invertors Pack Cat.Nos Conversion of a fixed device into a
draw-out device
The mechanical interlock is set up using cables and
can interlock 2 or 3 devices, which may be different Converting a fixed device requires a base
type in a vertical or horizontal configuration and a set of rear terminals
The interlock unit are mounted on the right-hand
side of the device (see p. 44) 3P 4P Bases for draw-out device
Supplied complete with cable set 1 6263 86 6263 87 For DMX-E 55 and DMX-E 65, In ≤ 1 600 A
1 6263 80 1 standard power supply + 1 standby power supply 1 6263 88 6263 89 For DMX-E 65, In = 2 000 and 2 500 A
DMX-E 80, In = 2 000 and 2 500 A
1 6263 81 3 power supplies
1 6263 90 6263 91 For DMX-E 80, In = 3 200 and 4 000 A
1 6263 82 2 standard power supplies + 1 standby power supply DMX-E 100, In = 2 000 and 2 500 A
1 6263 83 2 power supplies + 1 coupler
Rear terminals
Rear terminals are supplied singly the
number to be ordered for each device is
indicated in bold type
Accessories 1 6263 30 Horizontal or vertical 400 - 1 600 A
Rating mis-insertion device 3 P (3) 4 P (4)
Prevents the insertion of a draw-out circuit breaker 1 6263 31 Horizontal 2 000 - 2 500 A
in an incompatible base 3 P (3) 4 P (4)
1 6263 20 Rating error prevention 1 6263 32 Vertical 2 000 - 2 500 A
3 P (3) 4 P (4)
Operation counter
Counts total number of operation cycles 1 6263 30 Horizontal or vertical 3 200 - 4 000 A
3 P (6) 4 P (8)
1 6263 24 Operation counter

Red catalogue numbers: New products

175
]
DPX Products and systems

MCCBs: DPX
[

DPX are MCCBs and trip-free switches, known as "moulded case" units,
for controlling and protecting circuits up to 1 600 A

The DPX system from 16 to 1 600 A


Simple, set criteria for selecting a DPX

Type of release
[thermal magnetic or electronic]
and breaking capacity [16, 25, 36, 50,
70 and 100 kA]
Size of unit:
125, 160, 250 ER, 250, 630, 1 250, 1600
Version: fixed, plug-in
or draw-out [from 250 A]
A perfect fit: in the new
3
XL cabinets and enclosures
Auxiliaries that are common
to the whole range

DPX can also be used with earth


leakage modules

Legrand advantages

1 1 device = 1 catalogue number

Single installation principle


2 irrespective of the device rating
or version

Mounted under faceplate


3 in standard or optimised
distribution solutions

176
Installation principle
1 Mounting
DPX 125, 160 and 250 ER are mounted on 3 rail. DPX 250, 630, 1 250 and 1600 can only
They can also be installed on special plates be mounted on special plates

2 Connection (2 options)
Via front terminals Via rear terminals
Connect directly on plate (bar or cable with lug) Connect bars or cables with lugs to the rear terminals
or via cage terminal (cables) or on a base mounted directly on the devices (fixed version)
(for plug-in or draw-out versions) or on bases (for plug-in or draw-out versions)

Connection via cables Connection via bars Connection via bars

FOR MORE INFORMATION


Consult the E-Catalogue:
product guides, technical data sheets, etc.

177
DPXTM 125 DPXTM 125
MCCBs from 16 to 125 A electronic earth leakage modules
thermal magnetic motor operators

250 18 250 59

250 45 + 260 13
Dimensions (p. 62 and p. 63)
Electrical characteristics (p. 40 and p. 41)

MCCBs for switching, control isolation and protection of low voltage Pack Cat.Nos Electronic earth leakage modules
electrical lines
Can be fitted with control and signalling auxiliaries Can be fitted directly onto DPX/DPX-I 125
Can be used with earth leakage modules (opposite) or with residual 230 V - 500 V±
current relays (p. 193) Adjustable, sealable sensitivity:
Supplied complete with: 0.03 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 A
- cage terminals Adjustable, sealable tripping:
- terminal shields 0 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 s
Conform to IEC 60947-2 Equipped with:
Fixed version • test push-button
Thermal release adjustable from 0.7 to 1 In • reset push-button
Fixed magnetic at 10 In in factory Remote earth fault signalling contact
Thermal adjustement sealable Switch for mechanical tests on operation
and insulation of the device (installation
insulation test)
Pack Cat.Nos DPX-E 125 Mounted side by side
3P 4P In
±)
Breaking capacity Icu: 16 kA (230 V
1 260 02 260 03 63 A
1P In
1 260 12 260 13 125 A
1 250 00 16 A
1 250 01 20 A Mounted underneath
1 250 02 25 A 1 260 04 63 A
1 250 03 32 A 1 260 14 125 A
1 250 04 40 A
1 250 05 50 A
1 250 06 63 A
1 250 07 80 A Motor operators
1 250 08 100 A
1 250 09 125 A For remote making and breaking of a DPX
±)
Breaking capacity Icu: 16 kA (400 V circuit and reset in the even of tripping
3P 4P In on a fault
A lock prevents operation when working
1 250 16 250 24 16 A on the line
1 250 17 250 25 25 A 1 261 00 Front operated 24 V =± =
1 250 18 250 26 40 A 1 261 03 Front operated 230 V /
1 250 19 250 27 63 A
1 250 20 250 28 100 A
1 250 21 250 29 125 A
3 P + N/2 In
1 250 23 125 A

DPX 125
±)
Breaking capacity Icu: 25 kA (400 V
3P 4P In
1 250 36 250 44 16 A
1 250 37 250 45 25 A
1 250 38 250 46 40 A
1 250 39 250 47 63 A
1 250 40 250 48 100 A
1 250 41 250 49 125 A
3 P + N/2 In
1 250 43 125 A
±)
Breaking capacity Icu: 36 kA (400 V
3P 4P In
1 250 50 250 58 16 A
1 250 51 250 59 25 A
1 250 52 250 60 40 A
1 250 53 250 61 63 A
1 250 54 250 62 100 A
1 250 55 250 63 125 A
3 P + N/2 In
1 250 57 125 A

178
DPXTM 125 DPXTM 125
rotary handles
mounting and connection accessories

■ Mounting
Mounting on rail 4
with plate
(XL3 160 p. 199, XL3 400 p. 210, XL3 800 p. 224)
Spacer
262 99

262 01 263 01

Pack Cat.Nos Mounting on rail 4


For fixing on upright
Comprising one Plate 262 08
aluminium mounting
rail and 2 fixing
brackets
1 202 00 For XL3 400
1 206 00 For XL3 800
24 modules/row
Din-rail fixing plate
■ Connection
1 262 08 For mounting DPX 125
with or without earth leakage DPX front terminals
module on rail 4 With cables With bars
For fixing on plate
1 202 10 Device only, vertical position
1 202 12 Device + earth leakage module, vertical max. 12
max. Ø 12
position
1 202 14 Device or device + earth leakage module,
horizontal position
Spacer for modular devices
1 262 99 4
Fits on a rail ; can be used to mount on
the same row DX and DPX 125 on plate
Cat.No 262 08
6 Nm 6 Nm

Rotary handles
Direct on DPX
1 262 01 Standard (grey)
1 262 03 For emergency use (red/yellow)
Vari-depth handle
Including:
■ Motor operators
- connection rod
- bracket
- self adhesive drilling template
- mounting accessories
- door lock mechanism
1 262 02 Standard (grey)
1 262 04 For emergency use (red/yellow)

Connection accessories
Insulated shields
Used to isolate the connection between
each pole
1 262 07 Set of 3
3P 4P Sealable terminal shields
1 262 05 262 06 Set of 2
Padlock
1 262 00 For locking in "OFF" position
3P 4P Rear terminals
1 263 00 263 01 Used to convert the fixed version with front
terminals to the fixed version with rear
terminals
Set of 6 (or 8) rear terminals, incoming or
outgoing

Red catalogue numbers: New products

179
DPXTM 160 DPXTM 160
MCCBs from 25 to 160 A electronic earth leakage modules
thermal magnetic motor operators, supply invertor type

251 25 251 72 261 95

251 33 + 260 21
Dimensions (p. 64 and p. 65)
Electrical characteristics (p. 40 to p. 41)
Pack Cat.Nos Electronic earth leakage modules
MCCBs for switching, control isolation and protection of low voltage Can be fitted directly onto DPX/DPX-I 160
electrical lines 230 V - 500 V ±
Can be fitted with control and signalling auxiliaries Adjustable, sealable sensitivity:
Can be used with earth leakage modules (opposite) or with residual 0.03 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 A
current relays (p. 193) Adjustable, sealable tripping:
Supplied complete with: 0 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 s
- connection plates for bars Equipped with:
- upstream and downstream connection devices for lugs (width • test push-button
max. 20 mm) • reset push-button
- terminal shields Remote earth fault signalling contact
Conform to IEC 60947-2 Switch for mechanical tests on operation
Fixed version and insulation of the device (installation
Thermal adjustable from 0.64 to 1 In insulation test)
Fixed magnetic at 10 In in factory Mounted side by side
Thermal adjustement sealable 3P 4P In
1 260 20 260 21 160 A
Pack Cat.Nos DPX 160 Mounted underneath
±)
Breaking capacity Icu: 25 kA (400 V 1 260 22 160 A
3P 4P In
1 251 23 251 31 63 A Motor operators
1 251 24 251 32 100 A
For remote making and breaking of a DPX
1 251 25 251 33 160 A circuit and reset in the even of tripping
3 P + N/2 In on a fault
1 251 27 160 A A lock prevents operation when working
±)
Breaking capacity Icu: 36 kA (400 V on the line
3P 4P In 1 261 10 Front operated 24 V=
1 251 49 251 57 63 A 1 261 13 ±=
Front operated 230V /
1 251 50 251 58 100 A
1 251 51 251 59 160 A
Supply invertor type
3 P + N/2 In
1 251 53 160 A Mounting plate
±)
Breaking capacity Icu: 50 kA (400 V 1 264 01 For mechanical interlocking of 2 DPX of the
3P 4P In same size for use in normal or automatic
modes
1 251 62 251 70 40 A Mounting plate for mechanical interlock
1 251 63 251 71 63 A
Electronic control box
1 251 64 251 72 100 A For detecting the absence of voltage or a
1 251 65 251 73 160 A drop in voltage: triggers the opening of a
3 P + N/2 In power supply source
1 251 67 160 A 1 261 95 24 V=
1 261 96 230 V±
NB: for automatic version, add 2 remote
controls and 2 auxiliary contacts

180
DPXTM 160 DPXTM 160
rotary handles
mounting and connection accessories

■ Mounting
Mounting on rail 4
with plate
(XL3 160 p. 199, XL3 400 p. 210, XL3 800 p. 224)
Spacer
262 99

262 11 263 10

Pack Cat.Nos Mounting on rail 4


For fixing on upright Plate 262 09

Comprising one aluminium mounting rail


and 2 fixing brackets
1 202 00 For XL3 400
1 206 00 For XL3 800, 24 modules/row
Din-rail fixing plate
1 262 09 For mounting DPX 160 with or without earth
leakage module on rail 4 ■ Connection
For fixing on plate DPX front terminals
1 202 10 Device only, vertical position
With cables With bars
1 202 12 Device + earth leakage module, vertical
position
max. 18
1 202 14 Device or device + earth leakage module,
horizontal position Ø 8.5
max. Ø 18
Spacer for modular devices
1 262 99 4
Fits on a rail ; can be used
to mount on the same row DX

max. 10
and DPX 160 on plate
Cat.No 262 09

Rotary handles
Direct on DPX 10 Nm 10 Nm
1 262 11 Standard (grey)
1 262 13 For emergency use (red/yellow)
Vari-depth handle
Including: connecting rod, bracket,
self-adhesive drilling template, mounting
accessories, door locking mechanism
1 262 12 Standard (grey) ■ Motor operators
1 262 14 For emergency use (red/yellow)

Connection accessories
Insulated shields
Used to isolate the connection between
each pole
1 262 07 Set of 3
3P 4P Sealable terminal shields
1 262 15 262 16 Set of 2
Padlock
1 262 10 For locking in "OFF" position
Cage terminals
For connecting bare cables without lugs
1 262 18 Set of 4 terminals for cable 95 mm2 max.
(or 70 mm2 flexible)
1 262 19 Set of 4 high-capacity terminals for cable
120 mm2 max. (or 95 mm2 flexible)
Adaptor for lug
For connecting bare cables with wide lug
1 262 17 Set of 1 adaptor + insulated shields
3P 4P Rear terminals
1 263 10 263 11 Used to convert the fixed version with front
terminals to the fixed version with rear
terminals
Set of 6 (or 8) rear terminals, incoming or
outgoing
Red catalogue numbers: New products

181
DPXTM 250 ER DPXTM 250 ER
MCCBs from 100 to 250 A electronic earth leakage modules
thermal magnetic plug-in version

252 55 265 13

252 56 + 260 36
Dimensions (p. 66 and p. 67)
Electrical characteristics (p. 40 and p. 41)
Pack Cat.Nos Electronic earth leakage modules
MCCBs for switching, control isolation and protection of low voltage Can be fitted directly onto DPX/DPX-I 250 ER
electrical lines 230-500 V ±
Can be fitted with control and signalling auxiliaries Adjustable, sealable sensitivity:
Can be used with earth leakage modules (opposite) or with residual 0.03 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 A
current relays (p. 193) Adjustable, sealable tripping:
Supplied complete with: 0.03 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 s
- connection plates for bars Equipped with:
- upstream and downstream connection devices for lugs (width • test push-button
max. 20 mm) • reset push-button
- terminal shields Remote earth fault signalling contact
Conform to IEC 60947-2 Switch for mechanical tests on operation
Fixed version and insulation of the device (installation
Thermal adjustable from 0.64 to 1 In insulation test)
Fixed magnetic at 10 In in factory Mounted side by side
Thermal adjustement sealable 4P In
1 260 31 160 A
Pack Cat.Nos DPX 250 ER 1 260 36 250 A
±
Breaking capacity Icu: 25 kA (400 V ) Mounted underneath
3P 4P In 1 260 33 160 A
1 252 04 252 14 100 A 1 260 38 250 A
1 252 05 252 15 160 A
1 252 06 252 16 250 A
3 P + N/2 In
Plug-in version
1 252 09 250 A A plug-in is a DPX fitted with tulip contacts
±
Breaking capacity Icu: 36 kA (400 V ) mounted on a base
3P 4P In 3P 4P Tulip contacts
1 252 24 252 34 100 A 1 265 12 265 13 Set of tulip contacts supplied with an
1 252 25 252 35 160 A incoming/outgoing protective cover
1 252 26 252 36 250 A Bases
3 P + N/2 In Can accept DPX and DPX-I fitted with tulip
contacts
1 252 29 250 A
1 265 14 265 15 Front terminal mounting base
±
Breaking capacity Icu: 50 kA (400 V )
1 265 16 265 17 Rear terminal mounting base
3P 4P In
1 252 44 252 54 100 A Connectors
1 252 45 252 55 160 A For connecting the auxiliaries included
1 252 46 252 56 250 A 4P in the DPX
3 P + N/2 In 1 263 99 1 set of connectors (8-pin)
1 252 49 250 A
Supply invertor type
Mounting plate
1 264 02 For mechanical interlocking of 2 DPX of the
same size for use in normal or automatic
modes
Mounting plate for mechanical interlock
Electronic control box
For detecting the absence of voltage or a
drop in voltage: triggers the opening of a
power supply source
1 261 95 24 V=
1 261 96 230 V±
NB: for automatic version, add 2 remote
controls and 2 auxiliary contacts

Red catalogue numbers: New products

182
DPXTM 250 ER DPXTM 250 ER
rotary handles
mounting and connection accessories

■ Mounting
Mounting on rail 4
with plate
(XL3 160 p. 199, XL3 400 p. 210, XL3 800 p. 224)
Spacer
262 99

262 99 262 11 262 07

Pack Cat.Nos Mounting on rail 4 Plate 262 09


For fixing on upright
Comprising one aluminium mounting rail
and 2 fixing brackets
1 202 00 For XL3 400
1 206 00 For XL3 800, 24 modules/row
Din-rail fixing plate
1 262 09 For mounting DPX 250 ER with or without ■ Connection
earth leakage module on rail 4 DPX front terminals
For fixing on plate
1 202 10 Device only, vertical position With cables With bars
1 202 12 Device + earth leakage module, vertical
position
1 202 16 Device or device + earth leakage module, max. 18
horizontal position Ø 8.5
max. Ø 18
Spacer for modular devices
1 262 99 4
Fits on a rail ; can be used to mount on
the same row DX and DPX 250 ER on plate

max. 10
Cat.No 262 09

Rotary handles
Direct on DPX
1 262 11 Standard (grey) 10 Nm 10 Nm
1 262 13 For emergency use (red/yellow)
Vari-depth handle
Including:
- connecting rod
- bracket
- self-adhesive drilling template DPX rear terminals Plug-in version, rear terminals
- mounting accessories
- door lock mechanism max. 20
1 262 12 Standard (grey)
1 262 14 For emergency use (red/yellow)
17 mm

Connection accessories
Insulated shields
Used to isolate the connection
between each pole 10 Nm
1 262 07 Set of 3
3P 4P Sealable terminal shields
1 262 85 262 86 Set of 2

Padlock
1 262 10 For locking in "OFF" position
Connection terminals
1 262 88 Set of 4 terminals for cables without lugs
185 mm2 max. (rigid) or 150 mm2 max.
(flexible)
Spreaders
For increasing the distance between each
3P 4P pole to be connected
1 262 90 262 91 Set of incoming or outgoing spreaders
Rear terminals
Used to convert the fixed version with front
terminals to the fixed version
with rear terminals
1 265 10 265 11 Set of 6 (or 8) rear terminals,
incoming or outgoing
Red catalogue numbers: New products

183
DPXTM 250
MCCBs from 40 to 250 A
thermal magnetic and electronic release

253 49 254 23 260 55

Dimensions (p. 68 and p. 69)


Electrical characteristics (p. 40 and p. 41)
MCCBs and moulded case MCBs for switching, control isolation and protection of low voltage electrical lines
Can be fitted with control and signalling auxiliaries
Can be used with earth leakage modules (opposite) or with residual current relays (p. 193)
Supplied complete with:
- connection plates for bars
- upstream and downstream connection devices for lugs (width max. 20 mm)
- terminal shields
Conform to IEC 60947-2 - Fixed version - Thermal adjustement sealable

Pack Cat.Nos DPX 250 thermal magnetic Pack Cat.Nos DPX 250 electronic release
(continued)
Thermal adjustable from 0.64 to 1 In
Magnetic adjustable from 3.5 to 10 In DPX-H 250 70 kA
Adjustment (p. 42) Breaking capacity Icu: 70 kA (400 V ) ±
DPX 250 36 kA 3P 4 P(2) In
±
Breaking capacity Icu: 36 kA (400 V ) 1 254 13 254 19 40 A
3P 4P In 1 254 15 254 21 100 A
1 253 28 253 45 40 A 1 254 16 254 22 160 A
1 253 29 253 46 63 A 1 254 17 254 23 250 A
1 253 30 253 47 100 A DPX-L 250 100 kA
1 253 31 253 48 160 A Breaking capacity Icu: 100 kA (400 V ) ±
1 253 32 253 49 250 A 3P 4 P(2) In
3 P + N/2 In 1 254 25 254 31 40 A
1 253 41 160 A 1 254 27 254 33 100 A
1 253 42 250 A 1 254 28 254 34 160 A
DPX-H 250 70 kA 1 254 29 254 35 250 A
±
Breaking capacity Icu: 70 kA (400 V )
3P 4P In
Electronic earth leakage modules
1 253 52 253 69 40 A
1 253 53 253 70 63 A Fitted directly onto DPX/DPX-I 250
1 253 54 253 71 100 A Adjustable, sealable sensitivity:
1 253 55 253 72 160 A 0.03 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 A
1 253 56 253 73 250 A Adjustable, sealable time delay:
0 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 s
3 P + N/2 In Equipped with: test and reset push-buttons,
1 253 66 250 A remote earth fault signalling contact
DPX-L 250 100 kA Switch for mechanical tests on operation
and insulation of the device (installation
Breaking capacity Icu: 100 kA (400 V )± insulation test)
3P 4P In Mounted underneath
1 253 80 253 89 100 A
Standard
1 253 81 253 90 160 A
3P 4P In
1 253 82 253 91 250 A
1 260 51 160 A
3 P + N/2 In 1 260 54 260 55 250 A
1 253 88 250 A
LED version
Monitors the isolation state of the
DPX 250 electronic release installation via a series of LEDs
4P In
Adjustment of Ir, Im (p. 42) 1 260 53 160 A
Indicator lamp(1) 1 260 57 250 A
Connector for test unit
Instantaneous protection If = 4 kA
DPX 250 36 kA
±)
Breaking capacity Icu: 36 kA (400 V
3P 4 P(2) In
1 254 01 254 07 40 A
1 254 03 254 09 100 A
1 254 04 254 10 160 A
1 254 05 254 11 250 A
(1) Minimum current for indicator lamp operation (30 % of In)
green: normal - fixed red: I ≥ 0.9 Ir - flushing red: I ≥ 1.05 Ir
(2) Adjustment of neutral on front panel

184
DPXTM 250
equipment
accessories

265 32 265 46 261 30 262 22

Pack Cat.Nos Plug-in version Pack Cat.Nos Rotary handles


A plug-in is a DPX fitted with tulip contacts Direct on DPX
mounted on a base 1 262 22 Standard (grey)
3P 4P Tulip contacts 1 262 24 Conversion kit for emergency use (can be
1 265 29 265 30 Set of tulip contacts supplied with an fitted on Cat.No 262 22)
incoming/outgoing protective cover Vari-depth handle
Bases Including: connection rod, bracket,
Can accept fitted with tulip contacts self-adhesive drilling template, mounting
• For DPX only accessories and door lock mechanism
1 265 31 265 32 Front terminal mounting base 1 262 23 Standard (grey)
1 265 33 265 34 Rear terminal mounting base with 1 262 24 Conversion kit for emergency use (can be
threaded rod fitted on Cat.No 262 23)
1 265 35 265 36 Flat rear terminal mounting base 1 262 25 Locking accessory
• For DPX with earth leakage module
1 265 37 Front terminal mounting base
1 265 38 Rear terminal mounting base with Mounting accessories
threaded rod
1 265 39 Flat rear terminal mounting base Insulated shields
Accessories Used to isolate the connection between
1 263 99 1 set of connectors (8-pin) each pole
1 098 19 1 set of connectors (6-pin) 1 262 30 Set of 3 insulated shields
1 263 43 Extractor handle 3P 4P Sealable terminal shields
1 262 26 262 27 Set of 2 long terminal shields
1 262 28 262 29 Set of 2 short terminal shields
Draw-out version Padlock
A DPX draw-out version is a plug-in DPX 1 262 21 For locking in "OFF" position
fitted with a "Debro-lift" device which can
be used to withdraw the DPX while keeping
it on its base Connection accessories
3P 4P "Debro-lift" device Cage terminals
1 265 45 265 46 For DPX only For connecting bare cables without lugs
1 265 47 For DPX with earth leakage module 1 262 35 Set of 4 terminals for cable 185 mm2 max.
Accessories for lifting device (or 150 mm2 flexible)
1 265 74 Signalling contact, plugged-in/drawn-out Adaptor for lug
1 265 75 Operating handle For connecting bare cables with wide lug
1 265 76 Ronis locking device 1 262 31 Set of 1 adaptor + insulated shields
1 265 78 Ronis locking device for motorised
draw-out Extended front terminals
1 262 32 For connections
Supply invertor type Spreaders
For increasing the distance between
Mounting plate 3P 4P each pole to be connected
For mechanical interlocking of 2 DPX of the 1 262 33 262 34 Set of 3 (or 4) rear terminals, incoming or
same size for use in manual or automatic outgoing
modes Rear terminals
1 264 08 Mounting plate for fixed version Used to convert the fixed version with front
1 264 03 Mounting plate for plug-in type and terminals to the fixed version with rear
draw-out version terminals
Electronic control box 1 263 31 263 32 Set of 6 (or 8) rear terminals, incoming
For detecting the absence of voltage or outgoing
or a drop in voltage: triggers the opening 1 265 27 265 28 Set of 6 (or 8) flat rear terminals, incoming
of a power supply source or outgoing
1 261 95 24 V=±
1 261 96 230 V

Motor operators
Front operated
1 261 30 24 V±
1 261 34 230 V±
Accessory
1 261 59 Ronis locking accessory

185
DPXTM 630
MCCBs from 250 to 630 A
thermal magnetic and electronic release

Green indicator lamp (only S1): normal operation


minimum current for indicator lamp operation
(30 % of In)

Fixed red indicator lamp: ≥ 0.9 Ir


Flushing red indicator lamp: I ≥ 1.05 Ir
connector for test unit

255 40 255 53 256 07(1)

Dimensions ((p. 70 and p. 71)


Electrical characteristics (p. 40 and p. 41)

MCCBs and moulded case MCBs for switching, control isolation and protection of low voltage electrical lines
Can be fitted with control and signalling auxiliaries
Can be used with earth leakage modules or with residual current relays (p. 193)
Supplied complete with:
- connection plates for bars
- terminal shields
Conform to IEC 60947-2
Fixed version - Thermal adjustement sealable

Pack Cat.Nos DPX 630 thermal magnetic Pack Cat.Nos DPX 630 electronic release
Thermal adjustable from 0.8 to 1 In Adjustment of Ir, Im, Tr, Tm (p. 187)
Magnetic adjustable from 5 to 10 In Instantaneous protection: 5 kA
Adjustment (p. 42) DPX 630 36 kA
DPX 630 36 kA Breaking capacity Icu: 36 kA (400 V ) ±
±
Breaking capacity Icu: 36 kA (400 V ) S1 - Adjustment of Ir, Im(2)
3P 4P In 3P 4 P(1) In
1 255 21 255 36 250 A 1 256 01 256 05 250 A
1 255 22 255 37 320 A 1 256 02 256 06 400 A
1 255 23 255 38 400 A 1 256 03 256 07 630 A
1 255 25 255 39 500 A
S2 - Adjustment of Ir, Tr, Im, Tm
1 255 24 255 40 630 A 1 256 26 256 30 250 A
3 P + N/2 In 1 256 27 256 31 400 A
1 255 32 320 A 1 256 28 256 32 630 A
1 255 33 400 A Sg - Adjustment of Ir, Tr, Im, Tm, Ig, Tg
1 255 35 500 A 1 256 51 256 55 250 A
1 255 34 630 A 1 256 52 256 56 400 A
DPX-H 630 70 kA 1 256 53 256 57 630 A
±
Breaking capacity Icu: 70 kA (400 V ) DPX-H 630 70 kA
3P 4P In Breaking capacity Icu: 70 kA (400 V ) ±
1 255 42 255 57 320 A
S1 - Adjustment of Ir, Im(2)
1 255 43 255 58 400 A 3P 4 P(1) In
1 255 45 255 59 500 A 1 256 10 256 14 400 A
1 255 44 255 60 630 A 1 256 11 256 15 630 A
3 P + N/2 In S2 - Adjustment of Ir, Tr, Im, Tm
1 255 52 320 A 1 256 35 256 39 400 A
1 255 53 400 A 1 256 36 256 40 630 A
1 255 55 500 A Sg - Adjustment of Ir, Tr, Im, Tm, Ig, Tg
1 255 54 630 A 1 256 60 256 64 400 A
DPX-L 630 100 kA 1 256 61 256 65 630 A

In
±
Breaking capacity Icu: 100 kA (400 V ) DPX-L 630 100 kA

1
3P
255 62 255 77
4P
320 A
Breaking capacity Icu: 70 kA (400 V ) ±
S1 - Adjustment of Ir, Im(2)
1 255 63 255 78 400 A 3P 4 P(1) In
1 255 65 255 79 500 A 1 256 18 256 22 400 A
1 255 64 255 80 630 A 1 256 19 256 23 630 A
3 P + N/2 In S2 - Adjustment of Ir, Tr, Im, Tm
1 255 73 400 A 1 256 43 256 47 400 A
1 255 75 500 A 1 256 44 256 48 630 A
1 255 74 630 A Sg - Adjustment of Ir, Tr, Im, Tm, Ig, Tg
1 256 68 256 72 400 A
1 256 69 256 73 630 A
(1) Adjustment of neutral on front panel
(2) Green indicator lamp

186
DPXTM 630 DPXTM 630
earth leakage modules

■ Performance data
S1 - Adjustment of Ir, Im

t Ir

Im
If
I

• Long delay protection against overloads with an adjustable threshold


based on the rms value of the current:
Ir = 0.4 - 0.5 - 0.7 - 0.8 - 0.95 - 1 x In (8 steps)
Tr = 5 s (fixed at 6 tr)
• Short delay protection against short-circuits with an adjustable Im
threshold:
260 63 Im = 1.5 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 8 - 10 x Ir (8 steps)
Tm = 0.05 s (fixed)
•Instantaneous protection
if with fixed threshold: If = 5 kA
Pack Cat.Nos Earth leakage modules
Can be fitted directly onto DPX/DPX-I 630
230-500 V ±
Adjustable, sealable sensitivity: S2 - Adjustment of Ir, Tr, Im, Tm
0.03 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 A
Adjustable, sealable time delay:
0 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 s t Ir
Equipped with: Tr
• test push-button Im
• reset push-button Tm
Remote earth fault signalling contact If
Switch for mechanical tests on operation I
and insulation of the device (installation
insulation test) • Long delay protection against overloads with an adjustable threshold
Mounted underneath based on the rms value of the current:
Standard Ir = 0.4 - 0.5 - 0.7 - 0.8 - 0.9 - 0.95 - 1 x In (8 steps)
3P 4P In Tr = 5 - 10 - 20 - 30 s (at 6 Ir) (4 steps)
1 260 60 260 61 400 A • Short delay protection against short-circuits with an adjustable Im
threshold:
1 260 64 260 65 630 A Im = 1.5 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 8 - 10 x Ir (8 steps)
LED version Tm = 0 - 0.1 - 0.2 - 0.3 s (4 steps)
Tm = 0.01 - 0.1 - 0.2 - 0.3 s at 12 x Ir (I2 t constant) (4 steps)
Monitors the isolation state of the • Instantaneous protection against short-circuits
installation via a series of LEDs with fixed threshold: If = 5 kA
4P In
1 260 63 400 A
1 260 67 630 A

Sg - Adjustment of Ir, Tr, Im, Tm, Ig, Tg

t Ir
Tr
Ig Im
Tg Tm
If
I

• Long delay protection against overloads with an adjustable threshold


based on the rms value of the current:
Ir = 0.4 - 0.5 - 0.7 - 0.8 - 0.9 - 0.95 - 1 x In (8 steps)
Tr = 5 - 10 - 20 - 30 s (at Ir) (4 steps)
• Short delay protection against short-circuits with an adjustable Im
threshold:
Im = 1.5 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 8 - 10 x Ir (8 steps)
Tm = 0.01 - 0.1 - 0.2 - 0.3 s (4 steps)
Tm = 0.01 - 0.1 - 0.2 - 0.3 s at 12 x Ir (I2 t constant) (4 steps)
• Instantaneous protection against short-circuits
with fixed threshold: If = 5 kA
• Earth fault measurement:
Ig: 0.2 - 0.3 - 0.4 - 0.5 - 0.6 - 0.7 - 0.8 - 1 x In (8 steps)
Tg: 0.1 - 0.2 - 0.5 - 1 s (4 steps)

187
DPXTM 630
equipment
accessories

265 57 265 67 262 50 262 51 262 48

Pack Cat.Nos Plug-in version Pack Cat.Nos Rotary handles


A plug-in is a DPX fitted with tulip contacts Direct on DPX
mounted on a base 1 262 41 Standard (grey)
3P 4P Tulip contacts 1 262 24 Conversion kit for emergency use (can be
1 265 50 265 51 Set of tulip contacts supplied with an fitted on Cat.No 262 41)
incoming/outgoing protective cover Vari-depth handle
Bases Including: connection rod, bracket,
Can accept fitted with tulip contacts self-adhesive drilling template, mounting
accessories and door lock mechanism
• For DPX only 1 262 42 Standard (grey)
1 265 52 265 53 Front terminal mounting base 1 262 24 Conversion kit for emergency use (can be
1 265 54 265 55 Rear terminal mounting base with fitted on Cat.No 262 42)
threaded rod
1 265 56 265 57 Flat rear terminal mounting base 1 262 25 Locking accessory
• For DPX with earth leakage module
1 265 58 Front terminal mounting base
1 265 59 Rear terminal mounting base with Mounting accessories
threaded rod Insulated shields
1 265 60 Flat rear terminal mounting base
Used to isolate the connection between
Accessory each pole
1 263 68 Extractor handle 1 262 30 Set of 3
3P 4P Sealable terminal shields
Draw-out version 1 262 44 262 45 Set of 2
Padlock
A DPX draw-out version is a plug-in DPX
fitted with a "Debro-lift" device which can 1 262 40 For locking in "OFF" position
be used to withdraw the DPX while keeping
it on its base Connection accessories
3P 4P "Debro-lift" device
1 265 66 265 67 For DPX mounting bases only Cage terminals
1 265 68 For DPX mounting bases with earth For connecting bare cables without lugs
leakage module 1 262 50 Set of 4 terminals for cable 300 mm2 max.
(or 240 mm2 flexible)
Accessories for lifting device 1 262 51 Set of 4 high-capacity terminals for cable
1 265 74 Signalling contact, plugged-in/drawn-out 2 x 240 mm2 (rigid) or 2 x 185 mm2 (flexible)
1 265 75 Operating handle
1 265 76 Ronis locking device Adaptor for lug
1 265 78 Ronis locking device for motorised For connecting bare cables with wide lugs
draw-out 1 262 46 Set of 4 adaptors + insulated shields
Extended front terminals
Supply invertor type 1 262 47 For connections
Spreaders
Factory assembled
For increasing the distance between
Mounting plate 3P 4P each pole to be connected
For mechanical interlocking of 2 DPX of the 1 262 48 262 49 Set of 3 (or 4) rear terminals, incoming or
same size for use in normal or automatic outgoing
modes Rear terminals
1 264 09 Mounting plate for fixed version
1 264 04 Mounting plate for plug-in type and Used to convert the fixed version with front
draw-out version terminals to the fixed version with rear
terminals
Electronic control box Set of 3 (or 4)
For detecting the absence of voltage 1 263 50 263 51 Swivel terminals
or a drop in voltage: triggers the opening 1 263 52 265 53 Flat terminals
of a power supply source
1 261 95 24 V=±
1 261 96 230 V

Motor operators
Front operated
1 261 40 24 V±±
1 261 44 230 V
Accessory
1 261 59 Ronis locking accessory

188
DPXTM 1 250 DPXTM 1 600
MCCBs from 800 to 1250 A MCCBs from 800 to 1 600 A
thermal magnetic electronic release

258 04 257 08

Dimensions (p. 72 and p. 73)


Dimensions (p. 72 and p. 73) Electrical characteristics (p. 40 and p. 41)
Electrical characteristics (p. 40 and p. 41)
MCCBs and moulded case MCBs for switching, control isolation and
protection of low voltage electrical lines
MCCBs and moulded case MCBs for switching, control isolation and Can be fitted with control and signalling auxiliaries (integrated terminal blocks)
protection of low voltage electrical lines Can be used with earth leakage modules or with residual current
Can be fitted with control and signalling auxiliaries (integrated terminal relays (p. 193)
blocks) Supplied complete with:
Can be used with earth leakage modules or with residual current - connection plates for bars
relays (p. 193) - terminal shields
Supplied complete with: Conform to IEC 60947-2
- connection plates for bars Fixed version
- terminal shields Adjustment of Ir, Im, Tr, Tm (see p. 42)
Conform to IEC 60947-2 Instantaneous protection If = 20 kA
Fixed version Connector for test unit
Thermal adjustable from 0.8 to 1 In (see p. 42) Indicator lamp: minimum current for indicator lamp operation (30 % In):
Magnetic adjustable 5 to 10 < 1 000 A ≤ 3 to 6 In (see p. 42) green: normal - fixed red: I ≥ 0.9 Ir - flushing red: I ≥ 1.05 Ir

Pack Cat.Nos DPX 1600


Pack Cat.Nos DPX 1 250
Breaking capacity Icu: 50 kA (400 V ±) Breaking capacity Icu: 50 kA (400 V ) ±
3P 4 P(1) In S1 - Adjustment of Ir, Im
1 258 02 258 09 800 A 3P 4 P(1) In
1 258 03 258 10 1 000 A 1 257 02 257 06 800 A
1 257 03 257 07 1 250 A
1 258 04 258 11 1 250 A 1 257 04 257 08 1 600 A
S2 - Adjustment of Ir, Tr, lm, Tm
In
DPX-H 1 250 1 257 26 257 30 800 A
Breaking capacity Icu: 70 kA (400 V ±) 1 257 27 257 31 1 250 A
3P 4 P(1) In 1 257 28 257 32 1 600 A
1 258 16 258 23 800 A Sg - Adjustment of Ir, Tr, lm, Tm, Ig, Tg
1 258 17 258 24 1 000 A In
1 258 18 258 25 1 250 A 1 257 51 257 55 800 A
1 257 52 257 56 1 250 A
1 257 53 257 57 1 600 A
DPX-L 1 250
DPX-H 1600
Breaking capacity Icu: 100 kA (400 V ±) Breaking capacity Icu: 70 kA (400 V ) ±
3P 4 P(1) In
1 258 30 258 39 800 A S1 - Adjustment of Ir, Im
1 258 31 258 40 1 000 A 3P 4 P(1) In
1 258 32 258 41 1 250 A 1 257 10 257 14 800 A
1 257 11 257 15 1 250 A
1 257 12 257 16 1 600 A
S2 - Adjustment of Ir, Tr, lm, Tm
In
1 257 34 257 38 800 A
1 257 35 257 39 1 250 A
1 257 36 257 40 1 600 A
Sg - Adjustment of Ir, Tr, lm, Tm, Ig, Tg
In
1 257 59 257 63 800 A
1 257 60 257 64 1 250 A
1 257 61 257 65 1 600 A
(1) Neutral without protection (1) Adjustment of neutral on front panel

189
DPXTM 1 250 - 1 600 DPXTM 1 600
equipment MCCBs from 800 to 1 600 A
electronic release

■ Performance data
S1 - Adjustment of Ir, Im

t Ir

Im
If
I

• Long delay protection against overloads with an adjustable threshold


based on the rms value of the current:
Ir = 0.4 - 0.5 - 0.6 - 0.7 - 0.8 -0.9 - 0.95 - 1 x In (8 steps)
Tr = 5 s (at 6 Ir) (4 steps) - Fixed
• Short delay protection against short-circuits
with an adjustable Im threshold:
Im = 1.5 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 8 - 10 x Ir (8 steps)
Tm = 0.1 s (fixed)
• Instantaneous protection with fixed theshold: If = 15 ≤ 1 250 < 20

S2 - Adjustment of Ir, Tr, Im, Tm

265 84
t Ir
Tr
Im
Pack Cat.Nos Draw-out version Tm
If
A DPX draw-out version is a plug-in DPX I
fitted with a "Debro-lift" device which can
be used to withdraw the DPX while keeping • Long delay protection against overloads with an adjustable threshold
it on its base based on the rms value of the current:
Draw-out kit Ir = 0.4 - 0.5 - 0.6 - 0.7 - 0.8 - 0.9 - 0.95 - 1 x In (8 steps)
Tr = 5 - 10 - 20 - 30 s (at 6 x Ir) (4 steps)
The draw-out kit includes a base, a • Short delay protection against short-circuits
3P 4P "Debro-lift" device and brackets with an adjustable Im threshold:
1 265 82 265 83 Front terminals Im = 1.5 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 8 - 10 x Ir (8 steps)
1 265 84 265 85 Rear terminals Tm = 0 - 0.1 - 0.2 - 0.3 s (4 steps)
Tm = 0.01 - 0.1 - 0.2 - 0.3 s at 12 x Ir (I2 t constant) (4 steps)
Accessories for lifting device • Instantaneous protection against short-circuits
1 265 74 Signalling contact, plugged-in/drawn-out with fixed threshold: If = 20 kA
1 265 75 Operating handle
1 265 76 Ronis locking device, 1 key breaker only
1 265 80 Ronis locking device, 2 keys for motorised Sg - Adjustment of Ir, Tr, Im, Tm, Ig, Tg
breaker or with rotary handle

t Ir
Tr
Ig Im
Supply invertor type
Tg Tm
Mounting plate If
I
For mechanical interlocking of 2 DPX of the
same size for use in normal or automatic
modes • Long delay protection against overloads with an adjustable threshold
Factory-assembled based on the rms value of the current:
Ir = 0.4 - 0.5 - 0.6 - 0.7 - 0.8 - 0.9 - 0.95 - 1 x In
1 264 10 Mounting plate for fixed version (8 steps)
1 264 05 Mounting plate for plug-in and draw-out Tr = 5 - 10- 20 - 30 s (at 6 x Ir) (4 steps)
version • Short delay protection against short-circuits
Electronic control box with an adjustable Im threshold:
Im = 1.5 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 8 - 10 x Ir (8 steps)
For detecting the absence of voltage or Tm = 0 - 0.1 - 0.2 - 0.3 s (4 steps)
a drop in voltage: triggers the opening of Tm = 0.01 - 0.1 - 0.2 - 0.3 s at 12 x Ir (I2 t constant) (4 steps)
a power supply source • Instantaneous protection against short-circuits
1 261 95 24 V= with fixed threshold: If = 20 kA
• Earth fault measurement:
1 261 96 230 V± Ig: 0.2 - 0.3 - 0.4 - 0.5 - 0.6 - 0.7 - 0.8 - 1 x In (8 steps)
Tg: 0.1 - 0.2 - 0.5 - 1 s (4 steps)

190
DPXTM 1 250 - 1 600
rotary handles
accessories

262 61 262 60 262 70 262 67 + 262 68

Pack Cat.Nos Motor operators Pack Cat.Nos Connection accessories


For remote making and breaking of a DPX Cage terminals
circuit and reset in the event of tripping on
a fault For connecting bare cables without lugs
A lock prevents operation when working on 1 262 69 Set of 1 terminal
the line 2 x 240 mm2 (rigid) or
Factory assembled 2 x 185 mm2 (flexible)
1 261 54 Front operated 230 V ± 1 262 70 Set of 1 high-capacity terminal
4 x 240 mm2 for rigid cable
1 261 59 Ronis locking accessory
4 x 185 mm2 for flexible cable
Rear terminals
Used to convert the fixed version with front
terminals to the fixed version with rear
Rotary handles terminals
Set of 6 (or 8) rear terminals, incoming or
1 262 61 Direct on DPX outgoing
3P 4P
1 262 62 Vari-depth handle 1 263 80 263 82 Short terminals
Including: connection rod, bracket,
self-adhesive drilling template, mounting 1 263 81 263 83 Long terminals
accessories and door lock mechanism Extended front terminals
1 262 25 Locking accessory 1 262 67 Short terminals
1 262 68 Long terminals
Spreaders
For increasing the distance between each
Mounting accessories 3P 4P pole to be connected
Insulated shields 1 262 73 262 74 Set of 3 (or 4) rear terminals, incoming or
outgoing
Used to isolate the connections between
each pole
1 262 66 Set of 3 insulated shields
3P 4P Sealable terminal shields
1 262 64 262 65 Set of 2 short terminal shields
Padlock
1 262 60 For locking in "OFF" position

191
DPXTM DPXTM
control and signalling auxiliaries common auxiliaries from 16 to 1 600 A
electronic test unit for DPX, DPX-IS, DPX-I

261 60 261 85 261 98 Auxiliary contact or


fault signal
A singly Cat.No 261 60
Pack Cat.Nos Auxiliary contact or fault signal auxiliary contact or fault
signal
For signalling the state of the contacts or
opening of the MCCB on a fault
For DPX/DPX-I/DPX-IS from
16 A to 1 600 A
1 261 60 Changeover switch 3 A - 240 V

Releases
Allow remote tripping of a DPX
Shunt releases
For DPX-IS/DPX-I and DPX from 16 to 1 600 A Undervoltage releases
Shunt inrush power 300 VA
1 261 64 ± =
Coil voltage 24 V and
1 261 65 ± =
Coil voltage 48 V and
1 261 66 ± =
Coil voltage 110 V and
1 261 67 ± =
Coil voltage 230 V and
1 261 68 ± =
Coil voltage 400 V and
For DPX 125, For DPX 160 Undervoltage releases
DPX-IS 250/ to 1600,
630 DPX-IS 1 600, For DPX-IS/DPX-I and DPX from 16 to 1 600 A
DPX-I Undervoltage power consumption 5 VA
1 261 70 261 80 Coil voltage 24 V =
1 261 71 261 81 Coil voltage 24 V ± Shunt releases
1 261 72 261 82 Coil voltage 48 V =
1 261 76 261 86 Coil voltage 110 V ±
1 261 73 261 83 Coil voltage 230 V ±
1 261 74 261 84 Coil voltage 400 V ±
Time-lag (ms) undervoltage releases
Allow remote tripping of a DPX
Prevent false tripping in the event of AC
supply microbreaks
Require a time-lag module
connected to the undervoltage
releases below Time-lag undervoltage releases
Number of
Time-lag modules modules
1 261 90 230 V ± 3
1 261 91 400 V ± 3 Max. number of contacts per DPX-IS device
Undervoltage releases
Auxiliary contact Shunt release
1 261 75 For DPX-IS, DPX 125 and DPX 160 Device
AC EBAC FS or undervoltage release
1 261 85 For DPX 250 ER to 1600
Without DPX-IS 250 1 2 – –
release
Electronic test unit
With DPX-IS 250 1 1 1 1
release
1 261 98 For checking the operating characteristics
of an electronic MCCB via 2 n electronic unit
PALM III C AC = auxiliary contact
• identification of the undervoltage release EBAC = "early" auxiliary contact
• checking correct operation of the FS = break on trip contact
undervoltage release
• monitoring of trip curves Max. number of contacts per DPX device
• memorisation of causes of last trip:
overload, short-circuit (instantaneous or Auxiliary contact Shunt release
short delay), earth fault and phase affected Device
or undervoltage release
AC FS
• memorisation of number of occasions the
device has tripped on a fault since DPX 125 1 1 1
installation DPX 160 1 1 1
• measurement of current values for each
phase DPX 250 ER 1 1 1
• measurement of internal temperatures of DPX 250 2 1 1
the device
DPX 630 2 2 1
DPX 1 600 3 1 1

192
residual current relay and separate coils residual current relay and separate coils
for DPX and DPX-I

Residual current relay Cat.No 260 88


60
35 6 44

19 18 17 4 5 6

Delay
(s)

88

90
45
35
Trip On
60
40
20

Reset Test

20 21 1 2 3

Coils Cat.Nos 260 92/93/94/95/96 Coil Cat.No 260 97


260 88 260 93 coil for use with relay

22
6

L
L

C
A

M
D
D
5
E B 45 34
5.5 E 79
H
23

M
260 98
H
B
Add residual current protection to trip-free DPX MCCBs and switches
equipped with shunt trip or undervoltage release
Cat.Nos A B C D E H L M
Pack Cat.Nos Residual current relay 260 92 35 75 85 42 92 36 43 56
Detects fault currents, and, when used with a shunt 260 93 80 108 132 67 125 36 65 56
trip or an undervoltage release, it gives the trip 260 94 110 148 170 86 165 36 84 56
command to on MCCB or a switch 260 95 140 177 206 104 200 36 102 56
• Comprises: 260 96 210 270 295 150 290 44 145 64
- a tinged, sealable window 260 97 150 225 259 133 245 275 95 113
- an auxiliary contact
- a green Led indicating energisation
- 3 yellow Leds indicating respectively the max.
phase earth insulation current: 20, 40 and 60 %
- a red Led indicating
Fixed: exceeding of the insulation fault current value Cat.No 260 98
Flashing: breaking of one of the connections
between coils and relays
7

• For use with coils:


21

- Ø 35 and 80 mm
Adjustable sensitivity: 0.03, 0.05, 0.075, 0.1, 0.15,
0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 5, 7.5, 10, 15, 20, 30 A
- Ø 110 to 210 mm
Adjustable sensitivity: 0.3, 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 5,
5

7.5, 10, 15, 20, 30 A


- Ø 150 mm
58

Adjustable sensitivity: 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 5, 7.5,


10, 15, 20, 30 A
- Ø 300 mm
Adjustable sensitivity: 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 5, 7.5, 10, 15,
20, 30 A
NEW
• Adjustable trip: 0, 0.15, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2.5, 5 seconds
2 modules • Supply voltage: 230/240 V - 50/60 Hz
310 30
1 260 88 Residual current relay to clip on rail
368
400
Coils
For use with residual current relay Cat.No 260 88
(above) 1 coil per DPX
1 260 92 Coil Ø 35 mm
1 260 93 Coil Ø 80 mm
1 260 94 Coil Ø 110 mm
1 260 95 Coil Ø 140 mm
1 260 96 Coil Ø 210 mm
1 260 97 Coil Ø 150 mm - open
1 260 98 Coil Ø 300 mm - open

Red catalogue numbers: New products

193
DPXTM 125

■ Dimensions Fixed version, front terminals with earth leakage module mounted
side by side
Fixed version, front terminals
97
97 101 10 74 8 50.8
101 74 8
75.6
12 12 37.8 8 32

45
210

193
120

193
120

101
101

45
45

32.25
45
25.4 25.4 M4

25.4 Ø 4.3 or M4

Fixed version, rear terminals


75.6 101 97
74 8
Fixed version, rear terminals with earth leakage module mounted
side by side

97
101

101 74 8
120

101

45
45

25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4

45
210

M8

191
81
10

39

M4
45

32.25
25.4 25.4 25.4

M8
81

M4
39

Terminal shields
10
A

Direct rotative handle on DPX

75.5 60
25.4 8 74 48
20

A
DPX 125 170
11.2

DPX 125 + earth leakage module


103

260
80
80

mounted side by side


40.2

12.7 M4
20

Fixed version, front terminals with earth leakage module mounted


underneath(1)
202 97
101 101 Vari-depth handle on door
74
37.8 25.4 10
35
75.5
25.4 8 74 282 max. 2/4
72 min.
120

103

45

11.25
62.75
103
80

8
12.7
113.7
12.7 M4

(1) Dimensions of 3-pole earth leakage modules are the same as 4-pole earth leakage
modules

194
DPXTM 160

■ Dimensions Fixed version, front terminals with earth leakage module mounted
side by side
Fixed version, front terminals
120 8 97
97 30
120 74 8

9
90
45 8 23

150
45
150
150

247
265
45

45

M4

45
115
30 18 max. 30 23

14 30 30 M4 23
45 74 8

Fixed version, rear terminals

90 120 97

Fixed version, rear terminals with earth leakage module mounted


side by side
150

Y
45

30 30 30 30 30 74 8

150
45

45
X

55

247
265
241
95

55.5
48

161
158

45
115

30 30 30
74 8
120
97
45
M10

Fixed version, front terminals with earth leakage module mounted


underneath(1)
95
48

M4
Y
240 97
8

120 120 74 8
30 M4 8
==
=
95

86
132
150

45

X
=

Direct rotative handle on DPX


60

45 30
15 135 60
30 M4 8 74 48
Y
35
11.25
115
80

38.5

Terminal shields
1.5 max.
15
75.5
A

Vari-depth handle on door


A 35
DPX 160 278 30 M4 8 74 282 max. 2/4
72 min.
DPX 160 + earth leakage module 393
mounted side by side
11.25
115
80

38.5

15
(1) Dimensions of 3-pole earth leakage modules are the same as 4-pole earth leakage
modules 75.5

195
DPXTM 250 ER

■ Dimensions Fixed version with earth leakage module mounted side by side
Fixed version, front terminals Front terminals Rear terminals

8 18 Ø max. 120 8 18 Ø 18 max.


120

10 max.
90 18 30 30 30

10 max.
30 30 30

M4

M4
M4
91.5
176

145
115

45
45
45
38.5

53.5

237

267
298

62.7

62.7
107.7
69

1.6

45

45
30 30 30 18
20 max. 11.5

52.8
74

67.8
45

83.3
97

1.6

10 max.
30 30 30 18 74 11.5
8
74 11.5 97
20 max. 45
97
Fixed version, front terminals with earth leakage module
mounted underneath
160 A

Terminal shields
Y
240
120 120
30 97
== 74
95
176

X
76.5
115
A
60

45 30
15 135
A
M4

Y
DPX 250 ER 296
DPX 250 ER + earth leakage 418
module

250 A

270
150
Direct rotative handle on DPX and vari-depth handle on door
30 30 30 15
30 30 30
282 max.
72 min.
60 35
30 M4 8 74 48 2/4

35
215.5

145

176
115

11.25
38.5

53.5

115
69

80

38.5

20 max.
1.5 max.
30 30 30 15
30 30 75.5
45

196
DPXTM 250

■ Dimensions Draw-out version, front terminals


187 140 (4 P)
Fixed version, front terminals
34 45.5 105 (3 P)
105 20 52.35

5
140 105 32.5
100 70 17 •
36 34
35 17.5 4 min.
34

192.75
11

144.75

124.5
173.5
200

170

99.5

66.5
94

155

90
M5 X

10

94

449.5
353.5

313
25 52.5 27
35 35 35 35 35 138.5

24.75
Fixed version with earth leakage module mounted side by side(1) Ø9
Front terminals Rear terminals
138.5
105 138.5
140 34
11 36 105 4 min. 35 35 35
24 52.5
Y
Draw-out version, rear terminals
10

100 Rear terminal with threaded rod


187 35 35
34 34 45.5
94

47.5
M12
278

93.5
281.5
308

108.75
99.5

66.5
155

173.5
35 35 35

90
10

94
24.75

M12

93.5

47.5
35 17.5
70 M5 27

Flat rear terminal


187 35 35
Plug-in version, front terminals
34 34 45.5 19
105 140 186.5
20 32.5 Ø9 10
81
26
108.75
99.5

37
4 4 min.
33

66.5
155

173.5
90
94

35 35 35
24.75

19 Ø9
66.5
341.5

26 10
245.5

200
90
94

81

37

Terminal shields

Ø9

35 35 35 35 35 153
A

A
DPX 250 330
Plug-in version, rear terminals
DPX 250 + earth leakage module
105 186.5 438
mounted side by side
100 140 153
35 4 min.
Direct rotative handle on DPX and vari-depth handle on door
265 max. 71.5
93 min.
100 40 58
66.5
173.5

173.5
200

90

2.5 max.
94

50 2/4
25

52.5 153
94

35 35 35 35 35

(1) Dimensions of 3-pole earth leakage modules are the same as 4-pole earth leakage
modules

197
DPXTM 630

■ Dimensions Draw-out version, front terminals


Fixed version, front terminals 130 183 34 45.5 34
29

5
144
140 183 105 4 min. 34
32 70 32 70 17 50

265

398
100

302

265
130
100

155
94
X

15 max.
260
220

94

15 max.
94

24.7
14

43.5 43.5 43.5 187


43.5 87 M5 Y
43.5 43.5 43.5 43.5 43.5 27

Draw-out version, rear terminals


Fixed version with earth leakage module mounted side by side
Rear terminal with threaded rod
Front terminals Rear terminals
45.5 34
183 144 34
70 105 4 min. 144
21.75 17 50 43.5 43.5 43.5
32 105 4 min.
M 16

103
130
220

155
94
100

58
94

24.7
372
412

372

187

Flat rear terminal


45.5 34
87 Ø 6 or 34
M5
43.5 43.5 43.5 27
43.5 43.5 8
130

Plug-in version, front terminals


220

155

15
94

29
124

140 183 153


59

32 70 29
24.7

187

100 100
Terminal shields
398

302

220
130
94

94

X
A

A
4 min.
DPX 630 390
Ø 14
43.5 43.5 43.5 43.5 43.5 192 DPX 630 + earth leakage module 542
mounted side by side

Plug-in version, rear terminals

140 183 192 Direct rotative handle on DPX and vari-depth handle on door
70 153
265 max. 71.5
93 min.
100 40 58
100 100 50
220
265

130
94

94

47

X
94

4 min. 2.5 max. 2/4

198
DPXTM 1 250 - DPXTM 1 600

■ Dimensions
Fixed version, front terminals
Y
Y 215
210 29
70 70 280
8
25 70 70 70 13 min.

100
169

20

25 max.
158
149

278
280

320

298
94
X X

M12

M10 M8
70 35
50 5 140
140
Y
Fixed version, rear terminals
Y

280 (4 P) Vertical Horizontal


210 (3 P)
13 32 12.5 163 12.5
105 23 140 98 140

12
40
90
169

145.5
100
145.5

M8
68

56
273

273
118

94
320
94

X X
40

6 6
14 3 2.5 max. 3 2.5 max.
Y 238 188 238
13 32

Draw-out version, rear terminals Terminal shields


299 364
256 325 34.5
325
360

480

70 70 70 70 70
218.5
253

Direct rotative handle on DPX Vari-depth handle on door


125
49 67.5 125
62.5 265 max. 81
62.5
93 min.
66.5

66.5
125

125

2.5 max. 2/4

199
[ DMX-EI, DPX-I, DPX-IS, VISTOP, DX-IS ] Products and systems

Main isolating switches,


isolating switches for rows,
circuits or groups of circuits
Isolating switches perform the isolation function by electrically
separating all or part of an installation to ensure the safety
of those working on it

The range:
The range of isolating switches comprises three main families:

Isolating switches with visible contact indication


The actual position of the contacts is clearly visible (for example, through a window)

DPX-IS VISTOP
• Isolation with visible contact • Isolation with visible contact
indication from 63 to 1600 A indication from 32 to 160 A
• Fixing on 2 rail or • Fixing on 2
on plate up to 250 A. rail or on plate
Above 250 A, fix on plate • External reversible
• Tripping version side handle or front handle
(common DPX auxiliaries)

NB: When the DPX-IS is equipped with a trip it becomes a trip-free isolating switch

Isolating switches with positive


contact indication Key facts
The position of the contacts and that of the handle
are linked (for example, when the handle
is in position O, the contacts are in open position) • Positive contact indication:
The position of the handle indicates
the position of the contacts
DX-IS
• Isolation with positive contact indication • Trip-free:
from 16 to 125 A This is obtained by the use
• Tripping version (common DX auxiliaries) of auxiliaries
• Red handle: main device
• Faulty contact indicator
• Fixing on rail2

200
Trip-free isolating switches
These enable remote opening of circuits

DMX-EI DPX-I
• Isolation • Isolation from 125 to 1600 A
from 630 to 4 000 A • Fixing on 2 rail or plate
• Fixed or draw-out up to 250 A.
version Above 250 A, fix on plate

How to select your isolating switch


4 criteria must be taken into consideration
when choosing your isolating switch:

In what type of distribution board


is it to be installed?
Main LV, secondary, control unit

What is its rating?


Directly dependent on the main power FOR MORE INFORMATION
Use of auxiliaries, remote control?
Information feedback See the online catalogue:
instructions, technical
What size? data sheets, etc.
For optimisation of the size of the enclosures

201
isolating switches
selection chart

VISTOP visible load break p. 85-86


Black handle
Rating (A) Front handle Side handle
3P 4P 3P 4P
32 224 98 /225 00
(1)
225 02 225 03 /05
(1)
225 07
63 225 12 225 15 225 16 225 18
100 225 20 225 22 225 25 225 27
125 225 34 225 39 225 44 225 46
160 225 51 225 53 225 54 225 56
(1) 2 P

DPX-IS visible load break p. 88 to 93


With release Without release
Right-hand Left-hand Right-hand Left-hand
Rating (A) Front handle Front handle
side handle side handle side handle side handle
3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P

63 266 30 266 34 266 40 266 44 266 50 266 54

100 266 31 266 35 266 41 266 45 266 51 266 55

160 266 32 266 36 266 42 266 46 266 52 266 56 266 02 266 06 266 12 266 16 266 22 266 26

250 266 33 266 37 266 43 266 47 266 53 266 57 266 03 266 07 266 13 266 17 266 23 266 27

400 266 72 266 74 266 76 266 78 266 80 266 82 266 60 266 62 266 64 266 66 266 68 266 70

630 266 73 266 75 266 77 266 79 266 81 266 83 266 61 266 63 266 65 266 67 266 69 266 71

800 265 91 265 95

1 000 265 92 265 96

1 250 265 93 265 97

1 600 265 94 265 98

DX-IS visible load break p. 113


With release Without release
Rating (A)
2P 3P 1P 2P 3P 4P
16 043 01 043 21
20 043 02 043 22 043 42 043 62
32 043 05 043 25 043 45 043 65
40 023 56 023 76 043 07 043 27 043 47 043 67
63 023 57 023 77 043 10 043 30 043 50 043 70
100 023 58 023 78 043 14 043 34 043 54 043 74
125 023 59 023 79 043 38 043 58 043 78

DPX-I visible load break p. 94


Rating (A) Devices 3P 4P
125 DPX-I 125 250 98 250 99
160 DPX-I 160 251 98 251 99
250 DPX-I 250 ER 252 98 252 99
250 DPX-I 250 253 98 253 99
400 DPX-I 630 255 86 255 87
630 DPX-I 630 255 88 255 89
800 DPX-I 1 600 257 94 257 95
1 250 DPX-I 1 600 257 96 257 97
1 600 DPX-I 1 600 257 98 257 99

Red catalogue numbers: New products

202
VistopTM 32 A VistopTM 32 A
full load break isolating switches full load break isolating switches

Conform to standards IEC NF EN 60947-3, BS EN 60947-3, VDE 0660


NBN EN 60947-3 Veritas approved
Red handle/yellow frontplate conform to VDE 0113, IEC 60 204-1,
EN 60 204
Glass fibre reinforced insulating casing, self-extinguishing at 960 °C
(NF C 20-455)
Handle can be locked in "OFF" position with 1 to 3 padlocks Ø 6 mm
Accept the following NC + NO auxiliary contacts Cat.Nos 227 03/08:
- 1 or 2 contacts (on handle side)

■ Electrical characteristics
Thermal rating (Ith)(1) 32 A
Terminals cages
225 05 225 02
Connection Cu 6 to 16 mm2

Insulation voltage (Ui) 690 V ±


Safety switch for on-load circuit breaking by visible isolation Impulse resistant current voltage (U imp) 8 kV
of the contacts
"Double break" type load switching with self-cleaning contacts by rapid 400 V 32 A (17 kW)
AC 22 A(2)
make and break movements 500 V 32 A (20 kW)
400 V 32 A (17 kW)
2 versions
AC 23 A(2) 500 V 20 A (14 kW)
• With handle on side of the unit for flange mounting: supplied complete
with gasket, screws and 30 to 170 mm extension shaft (supplied with 690 V -
the unit) Peak current (kA) 5
• With handle on front of the unit which can be used for a door interlock 1 s resistant current
facility to prevent the opening of an enclosure whilst circuits are 0.5
(kA rms) (Icw)
energized (Cat.No 227 34 below to be ordered separately) Icc with fuse (kA rating) 100
32 A (gG)
Max. rating of fuses 20 A (aM)
Pack Cat.Nos Black handle
Short-circuit capacity
Front Side No of 17.5 mm modules (kA prospective peak) (Icm) 0.75
Connection
handle handle Side handle removed
Mechanical endurance (No of operations) > 10 000
1 224 98 225 03 2P 4 3.5
16 mm2 IP 2x (16 mm2)
1 225 00 225 05 3P cage terminals 4 3.5 Index of protection IP 3x
under front plate
1 225 02 225 07 4P 5 4.5
AC: alternating current AC 22 A: Resistive motor breaking
A = use with frequent operations AC 23 A: Inductive motor breaking

■ Dimensions
Accessories Front handle
Left-hand side control Cat.Nos 224 98 - 225 00/02
Kit comprising: angle linking plate, fixing 2 P. 3 P : 70 max. : 191 mm 63
screws, front cover and technical sheet 4 P : 83 min. : 53 mm 44
Ø5
1 227 30 For black handle
Front external control
Kit comprising: connecting rod, racket,
drilling template and mounting accessories
51
92
82
53
45

1 227 34 Door distance 46 to 91 mm


Auxiliary switch for on/off signalling
5 A - 250 V± Connection
55
1 227 03 N/C +N/O 2 P.3 P : 26 88
lug 2.58 4 P : 39 92
1 227 08 2 set of N/C + N/O
2P 3P 4P
Weight (kg) 0.220 0.240 0.290

Side handle
Cat.Nos 225 03/05/07
2 P. 3 P : 98.5 69.5
4 P : 111.5 44
Ø 5
51
92
82
53
45

2 P.3 P : 26 28
65
4 P : 39 62

2P 3P 4P
Weight (kg) 0.300 0.320 0.370

Mounting on rail 4 or with 4 x M5 screws


(1) Continuity of service 8 h - IEC 60947-1
(2) Test conditions in accordance with IEC 60947-3

203
VistopTM 63 to 160 A
visible load break isolating switches, screws or 4 rail fixing
din-rail mounting

225 15 225 18 225 53 227 22

227 98 227 32

Technical information and dimensions (p. 205)

Safety isolating switches with visible breaking of load and positive action of the contacts
Double breaking of the phases by self-cleaning snap open/close action contacts
Label holders for identification of the circuits
Connection via cage terminals tightened by Allen key (except 63 A ; by PZ 2 screws)
Screw-fixing or on EN 50022 4 rail (only on rail for 63 A Vistop)
Two versions for mounting on faceplate:
• With left or right external side handle with seal to maintain the IP protection (up to IP 55), mounting accessories, self-adhesive drilling template,
adjustable extension rod (30 to 170 mm)
• With direct or external front handle with Cat.No 227 32 to be ordered separately
Possibility of attaching a 2-pole - 16 A auxiliary isolating switch Cat.No 227 22, or one or two N/C + N/O auxiliary Cat.No 227 04/07

Pack Cat.Nos Black handle Pack Cat.Nos Auxiliary isolating switch 2-pole - 16 A - 400 V
Front Side 63 A No of 17.5 mm For creating 3 or 4-pole assemblies for simultaneous
handle handle modules breaking of 2-pole auxiliary power supply
1 225 12 225 16 3-pole 7 (PLC, remote control), 16 A maximum
1 225 15 225 18 4-pole 7 Mounts on the left side of Vistop 100 to 160 A
No of 17.5 mm
100 A Connection modules
1 225 20 225 25 3-pole 7.5 1 227 22 2 P Cage terminals 1.5
1 225 22 225 27 4-pole 9
125 A
1 225 34 225 44 3-pole 7.5 Sealable terminal shields
1 225 39 225 46 4-pole 9 1 227 98 Set of 2 separate, sealable terminal shields
160 A Clip on upstream and/or downstream of
1 225 51 225 54 3-pole 7.5 Vistop 100 to 160 A
1 225 53 225 56 4-pole 9
Full load isolating switch units up to 160 A
(p. 215)
Front external handle
Kit comprising: connecting rods, bracket,
self-adhesive drilling template, mounting
accessories (including a seal for
maintaining the IP protection of
the enclosure up to IP 55) and locking
mechanism preventing the door being
opened when the circuit is closed
For Vistop fixing on 4 rail Door distance
or using screws (mm)
1 227 32 63, 100, 125 et 160 A 35 to 470

Auxiliary switches for on-off


signalling IP 2x - 5A - 250V
N/O + N/C contact
For incorporation in one-piece enclosure
1 227 04 Main contact
1 227 07 Additional N/C + N/O Door distance
auxiliary contact for (mm)
2 N/C + 2 N/O mounting lug 2.58

204
VistopTM 63 to 160 A
visible load break isolating switches

Conform to standards NF C 63-130, NF EN 60947-3, IEC 60947-3, ■ Dimensions


BS EN 60947-3, VDE 0660, NBN EN 60947-3,
CNOMO E03 - 15-611 R, Veritas approved Accept auxiliary contacts N/C + N/O (Cat.No 227 04/07) 1 or 2 (side
Version with red handle/yellow front plate conforms to standards NF C handle) (p. 86)
79-130, VDE 0113, IEC 60204-I, EN 60204 Front handle
Glass fibre reinforced insulating casing, self-extinguishing at 960 °C
(IEC NF EN 60695-2-1) 98
Handle can be padlocked in open position using 1 to 3 padlocks Ø 6 mm 74
C1
60

78
■ Electrical characteristics

C2
83
63
45
Isolating
Thermal switch
rating (Ith) 63 A 100 A 125 A 160 A 16 A(4) 22
6 44
Terminals cage cage cage cage cage
C min. 114 - max. 523
Connec- Cu (flexible) 4 to 352 4 to 50 mm2 62
tion Cu (rigid) 4 to 502 4 to 70 mm2 62
Insulating voltage Side handle
(Ui)
690 V ± 800 V ± 800 V ± 800 V ± 400 V ±
C1 8 32
Impulse resistant
8 kV 8 kV 8 kV 8 kV -
24
voltage (U imp)

400 V 63 A (35 kW) 100 A (55 kW) 125 A (70 kW) 160 A (88 kW) 16 A
AC 22 A

C2
83
66
63
45
500 V 63 A (44 kW) 100 A (69 kW) 125 A (87 kW) 160 A (110 kW) -
AC 23 A(1)
690 V 40 A (38 kW) 100 A (96 kW) 125 A (120 kW) 125 A (120 kW)
22.5

DC 22 A/250 V(1) (2) * 100 125 125 16 A 22


C1 C1 C1 16
44 6
DC 23 A/250 V(1) (2) * 100 125 125 10 A 60 C 50

Breaking capacity
15 15 15 15 2
(Icu) (kA peak)
1 s resistant current Front handle External side handle
2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 1
(kA rms) (Icw)
63 A 100 A, 125 A, 160 A 63 A 100 A, 125 A, 160 A
Icc 3 and 4-pole 3P 4P 3 and 4-pole 3P 4P
with fuses 100 100 100 80 100 C 125 133 160 125 133 160
(kA rms)
C1 17.7 26.7 17.7 26.7
Fuse rupture 100 A (gG) 125 A (gG) 160 A (gG) C2 90 91 90 91
63 A -
capacity 63 A (aM)(3) 125 A (aM)(3) 125 A (aM)
Short circuit capacity
(kA prospective peak) 7 12 12 12 1
(Icm)

Mechanical ■ Example of mounting with Vistop 100 to 160 A


endurance > 30 000 > 30 000 > 30 000 > 30 000 > 30 000
Front external handle
(No of operations)
Cat.No 227 32
IP 2x B
(IP 3x C under
Index of protection IP 2x B (IP 3x C under front plate) from 10 mm2
front plates)
from 6 mm2

Isolating
switch Vistop Sealable terminal
shields
Auxiliary Cat.No 227 98 Padlock
Cat.No 227 22 Cat.No 227 97

(1) Test conditions accordance with IEC 60947-3


AC = alternating current. DC = direct current. A = for frequent switching
AC 22 A/DC 22 A: resistive motor breaking
AC 23 A/DC 23 A: inductive motor breaking
(2) N° of breaking contacts: 2
(3) 100 A (aM) with blade type cartridge fuses
(4) Values correspond to the device mounted on Vistop 100 - 125 - 160 A

205
DPX-IS 250 isolating switches
63 to 250 A
mounting and connection accessories

266 37 266 47

Isolating switches for on-load circuit breaking by visible isolation and positive action of the contacts
Connection with cage terminals
Padlock integrated in the handle
Supplied with terminal shields
Conform to IEC 60947-3
Category of use AC 23 A
Accept the same electrical auxiliaries as the DPX (see p. 207)

Pack Cat.Nos DPX-IS with release Pack Cat.Nos Mounting accessories


Supplied without shunt trip Emergency handle
Can be associated with a residual current For replacement of standard handles
relay with separate coils (p. 63)
1 266 89 Front and right side emergency handle
3P 4P Front handle 1 266 90 Left side emergency handle
1 266 30 266 34 63 A
Mounting kit for remote handle IP 55
1 266 31 266 35 100 A
Kit comprising: connecting rods, brackets,
1 266 32 266 36 160 A drilling template, mounting accessories
1 266 33 266 37 250 A (including a seal for maintaining the IP up
to 55) and locking mechanism preventing
Right-hand side handle the door being opened when the circuit is
1 266 40 266 44 63 A closed
1 266 41 266 45 100 A 1 266 86 For remote front and side handle
1 266 42 266 46 160 A 1 266 87 For remote front and side emergency handle(1)
1 266 43 266 47 250 A Fixing accessories
Left-hand side handle 1 262 39 Plate for mounting on rail
1 266 50 266 54 63 A 1 262 99 Spacer for modules device
1 266 51 266 55 100 A Fits on rail 4 so that they can combined
1 266 52 266 56 160 A with the DPX-IS 250 on the same row
1 266 53 266 57 250 A Terminal shields
1 262 87 Set of 2
Locking accessories
DPX-IS without release 1 266 92 Ronis key lock
3P 4P Front handle Interlock
1 266 02 266 06 160 A 1 266 94 Interlock module (one for each DPX-IS)
1 266 03 266 07 250 A Provides the closing of 2 devices at the
same time
Right-hand side handle
1 266 12 266 16 160 A
Connection accessories
1 266 13 266 17 250 A
Left-hand side handle Cage terminals
1 266 22 266 26 160 A 1 262 88 Set of 4 terminals for cable 185 mm2 max.
(rigid) or 150 mm2 max. (flexible)
1 266 23 266 27 250 A
Spreaders
1 273 22 Set of upstream and downstream
spreaders
3P 4P Rear terminals
1 265 10 265 11 Set of upstream and downstream
spreaders

Common auxiliaries to DPX

see p. 192

(1) To order together with Cat.No 266 89 or 266 90


Red catalogue numbers: New products

206
DPX-IS 250 isolating switches

■ Electrical characteristics Mounted on rail 4


72.5 105
Rating 63 A 100 A 160 A 250 A 70
Cu flexible 150 mm2 35 74
Connection
Cu rigid / Alu 185 mm2 40.5 8.5
Copper bar Width max. 28 mm
Nominal rating (Ue) 690 V ± - 250 V=

138

27
35

45
42
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) ±
800 V

Rated impulse withstand 11.5


8 kV±
voltage (Uimp)
1
400 V± 63 A 100 A 160 A 250 A 75
AC 23 A
690 V± 63 A 100 A 160 A 160 A 195 76.5

AC 22 A 690 V± 63 A 100 A 160 A 250 A

Short-circuit making capacity


(kA efficient) 40 kA With terminal shields
(Icm)
I admissible ls (Icw) 12 kA efficient 105 72.5 85.5
I admissible with fuse (Icc) 100 kA efficient 70
gG 63 A 100 A 160 A 250 A 35 74
Max. rating of fuse
aM 63 A 100 A 160 A 160 A
mechanical 25 000 operations

60
Endurance
electrical 2 500 operations
±

129
(AC 23 - 400 V ) 11.5
Index of protection IP 20 front panel

258
138

42
45
40.5
■ Dimensions

90 Ø 18 max. 8 74 50 min. 32
18 140 55
10 max.

17.5 35 35 35 300 max.


8 195
11.5
M4
M4
10 max.
138

45

77

42
45
77

1.5 ■ Mounting
28
max. 18
1-6 11.5 Mounted on rail with plate (XL3 400 p. 209, XL3 800 p. 224)
35 35 35
160 74 40.4 Spacer
195 262 99

Right lateral handle


90 Ø 18 max.
18
10 max.

17.5 35 35 35
8
M4
10 max.
138

45
77

Plate 262 39
28
1-6 11.5
max. 18
35 35 35
195 74 40.4

Left lateral handle


Distribution terminal
90° 048 68
35 35 35 17.5
138
77

28
max.
35 35 35
195

207
DPX-IS 630 isolating switches
400 to 630 A

266 62 266 70 262 50 262 51

Isolating switches for on-load circuit breaking by visible isolation and positive action of the contacts
Connection with cage terminals
Padlock integrated in the handle
Supplied with terminal shields
Conform to IEC 60947-3
Category of use AC 23 A
Accept the same electrical auxiliaries as the DPX (p. 192)

Pack Cat.Nos DPX-IS with release Pack Cat.Nos Connection accessories


Supplied without shunt trip Cage terminals
Can be associated with a residual current
relay with separate coil (p. 193) 1 262 50 Set of 4 terminals for cables 300 mm2 max.
(rigid) or 240 mm2 max. (flexible)
3P 4P Front handle
1 262 51 Set of 4 terminals for cables 2 x 240 mm2
1 266 72 266 74 400 A max. (rigid) or 2 x 185 mm2 max. (flexible)
1 266 73 266 75 630 A 3P 4P Spreaders
Right-hand side handle 1 262 48 262 49 Set of upstream or downstream spreaders
1 266 76 266 78 400 A Rear terminals
1 266 77 266 79 630 A 1 263 50 263 51 Set of upstream and downstream swivel
Left-hand side handle rear terminals
1 266 80 266 82 400 A 1 263 52 263 53 Set of upstream and downstream flat rear
1 266 81 266 83 630 A terminals

DPX-IS without release


3P 4PFront handle
1 266 60 266 62 400 A
1 266 61 266 63 630 A
Right-hand side handle
1 266 64 266 66 400 A
1 266 65 266 67 630 A
Left-hand side handle
1 266 68 266 70 400 A
1 266 69 266 71 630 A

Mounting accessories
Emergency handle
For replacement of standard handles
1 266 89 Front and right side emergency handle
1 266 90 Left side emergency handle
Mounting kit for remote handle IP 55
Kit comprising: connecting rods, brackets,
drilling template, mounting accessories
(including a seal for maintaining the IP up
to 55) and locking mechanism preventing
the door being opened when the circuit is
closed
1 266 86 For remote front and side handle
1 266 87 For remote front and side emergency handle(1)
Terminal shields
1 262 45 Set of 2
Locking accessory
1 266 97 Ronis key lock Common auxiliaries to DPX

see p. 192

(1) To order together with Cat.No 266 89 or 266 90

Red catalogue numbers: New products

208
DPX-IS 630 isolating switches

■ Electrical characteristics Left lateral handle


327.5
Rating 400 A 630 A
Cu flexible 1 x 240 or 2 x 185 mm2 265
Connection 43.5 43.5 48
Cu rigid/Alu 1 x 300 or 2 x 240 mm2 17

90

132
Copper bar width max. 32 mm

˚
Nominal rating (Ue) 690 V A - 250 V=

M5
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) A
800 V

200
138
160

42
94
Rated impulse withstand
8 kVA
voltage (Uimp)

400 VA 400 A 630 A

AC 23 A 500 VA 400 A 630 A 43.5 43.5 43.5 26 105


690 VA 400 A 630 A 181
AC 22 A 690 VA 400 A 630 A

DC 23 A 250 V= 400 A 630 A

Short-circuit Front handle with terminal shields


making capacity (kA efficient) 40 kA
(Icm) 130.5 108.2
I admissible ls (Icw) 20 kA efficient 87
43.5
I admissible with fuse 100 kA
(kA efficient) (Icc)

65.3
gG 400 A 630 A
Max. rating of fuse
aM 400 A 630 A

165.3
Mechanical endurance 15 000 operations
Electrical endurance 1 500 operations
(AC 23 - 400 V ) A

330.6
200

42
94
Index of protection IP 20 front panel

11
38.7

■ Dimensions
183.2 81.8 105
Front handle 265 116
48.1 43.5 43.5 105 38.2
32 max. 28 6
˚
90 17
200
138

42
15 max.

6
M5

Ø 25 max. 28 11

26.4 43.5 43.5 43.5

265

Right lateral handle


327.5

265
48 43.5 43.5
17
˚
90
132

M5
200
160
138
42

94

105 26 43.5 43.5 43.5


181

209
NEW
DPX-IS 1 600 isolating switches
800 to 1 600 A
accessories

265 98 262 65

Isolating switches for on-load circuit breaking by visible isolation and positive action of the contacts
Connection with cage terminals
Padlock integrated in the handle
Supplied with terminal shields
Conform to IEC 60947-3
Category of use AC 23 A
Accept the same electrical auxiliaries as the DPX (p. 192)

Pack Cat.Nos DPX-IS with release Pack Cat.Nos Connection accessories


Supplied without shunt release Cage terminals
Can be associated with a residual current
relay with separate coil (p. 193) 1 262 69 Set of 1 terminal for cables
2 x 240 mm2 max. (rigid)
3P 4P Front handle or 2 x 185 mm2 max. (flexible)
1 265 91 265 95 800 A 1 262 70 Set of terminal for cables
1 265 92 265 96 1 000 A 4 x 240 mm2 max. (rigid)
1 265 93 265 97 1 250 A or 4 x 185 mm2 max. (flexible)
1 265 94 265 98 1 600 A Spreaders
For increasing the distance between each
3P 4P pole to be connected
Mounting accessories 1 262 73 262 74 Set of upstream or downstream spreaders
3P 4P Sealable terminal shields Rear terminals
1 262 64 262 65 Set of 2 short terminal shields Set of 6 (or 8) rear terminals, upstream or
downstream
Insulation shields 1 263 80 263 82 Short terminals
Used to isolate the connections between
each pole 1 263 81 263 83 Long terminals
1 262 66 Set of 3 insulation shields Extended front terminals
1 262 67 Short terminals
1 262 68 Long terminals

Control and Residual


signalling current relay
auxiliaries and coils

see p. 192 see p. 193

Red catalogue numbers : New products

210
DPX-IS 1 600 isolating switches

■ Electrical characteristics ■ Dimensions


Rating 800 A 1 000 A 1 250 A 1 600 A Front handle with terminal shields
Cu flexible 2 x 185 mm2 or 4 x 185 mm2 280 204
Connexion Cu rigide 2 x 240 mm2 or 4 x 240 mm2 70 70 70 64
Alu 2 x 240 mm2 or 4 x 240 mm2

Copper bar 50 mm or 80 mm
205
±

169
Nominal rating (Ue) 690 V

158
149
100
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) 690 V±

280
320

298
278
Rated impulse

42

94
withstand voltage (Uimp) 8 kV ±

24 max.
400 V± 800 A 1 000 A 1 250 A 1 600 A

AC 23 A 500 V± 800 A 1 000 A 1 250 A 1 600 A

690 V± 800 A 1 000 A 1 250 A 1 600 A


35 M12
5 140
DC 23 A 250 V± 800 A 1 000 A 1 250 A 1 600 A 25 140 M10
50 210
I admissible is for 1s (Icw) 20 kA efficient

I admissible with fuse (Icc) 100 kA efficient

Max. rating of fuse 800 A 1 000 A 1 250 A 1 600 A Terminal shields


Short-circuit making capacity
40 kA
(kA peak) (Icm)

Mechanical endurance 10 000

Electrical endurance
3 000 3 000 2 000 2 000
±
(AC 23 A - 400 V )

Index of protection IP 20 front panel 320

211
DPX-ITM 125 to 1 600 A DPX - ITM 125 to 1 600 A
trip-free switches technical characteristics

■ Electrical characteristics
DPX-I 125 DPX-I 160 DPX-I 250 ER DPX-I 250 DPX-I 630 DPX-I 1 600
Rated 50/60 Hz 500 500 500 690 690 690
operating
voltage direct
Ue (V) 250 250 250 250 250 250

Rated
insulation 500 500 500 690 690 690
±
voltage Ui (V )
Rated impulse
withstand voltage 6 6 6 8 8 8
Uimp (kV)
Rated closing
capacity
on 400 V 3 3.6 4.3 4.3 13 40
short-circuit
Icm (kA)
250 99 253 99 Short-time
resistive
current t=1s 1.7 2.1 3 3 7.6 20
Icw (kA)
Dimensions (p. 62 to p. 73) Endurance
(o.c cycle)
mechanical 8 500 7 000 7 000 7 000 4 000 2 500
Conform to IEC 60947-3 electrical 1 500 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 500
Category of use AC 23 A Conventional
thermal current (A) 125 160 250 250 630 1 600
Trip-free switches for on-load circuit breaking and isolation of low voltage 125 160 250 250 630 1 600
electrical circuits AC 23 A (690 V ±) (500 V) (500 V) (500 V)
Can be associated to earth leakage modules or to corresponding DPX DC 23 A (250 V ±) 125 160 250 250 630 -
residual current relays
Mount on rail 2 up to DPX 250 ER
Connection identical to corresponding DPX
■ Dimensions
Pack Cat.Nos DPX-I 125 Dimensions of DPX-I identical to corresponding DPX
3P 4P In
DPX-I Dimensions
1 250 98 250 99 125 A
DPX-I 125 DPX 125 (see p. 62-63)
DPX-I 160 DPX 160 (see p. 64-65)
DPX-I 160
DPX-I 250 ER DPX 250 ER (see p. 66-67)
3P 4P In DPX-I 250 DPX 250 (see p. 68-69)
1 251 98 251 99 160 A
DPX-I 630 DPX 630 (see p. 70-71)
DPX-I 1 600 DPX 1 600 (see p. 72-73)
DPX-I 250 ER
3P 4P In
1 252 98 252 99 250 A

DPX-I 250
3P 4P In
1 253 98 253 99 250 A

DPX-I 630
3P 4P In
1 255 86 255 87 400 A
1 255 88 255 89 630 A

DPX-I 1 600
3P 4P In
1 257 94 257 95 800 A
1 257 96 257 97 1 250 A
1 257 98 257 99 1 600 A

Common auxiliaries to DPX (p. 192)

212
20 A isolating switch 20 A isolating switch
full load break isolating switch full load break isolating switch

Conform to standard IEC NF EN 60947-3

■ Electrical characteristics
Thermal rating 20 A
Rigid 102
Copper connection Flexible 0.75 to 62
with ferrules
Insulation voltage 690 V
AC 22 A 500 V 20 A
400 V 16 A
AC 23 A
690 V 10 A
1 s resistant current (kA efficient) 0.35
Icc with fuse (kA) rating 20
Max. rating of fuses 25
224 90 + 227 33 224 94 Short circuit making capacity (Icm) 1 kA
Mechanical endurance 100 000
(No of operations)
Index of protection IP 2x (wired)

Safety switch for on load circuit breaking by visible isolation


of the contacts
"Double break" type load switching with self
cleaning contacts by rapid make and break movements ■ Dimensions
Cat.No 224 90
Pack Cat.Nos Front control, red handle 44 18.5

1 224 90 3 P

Additional neutral pole

45
75

1 224 94 For making 3 P + N


27

Off (O)
Accessories
1 227 00 N/C + N/O auxiliary contact 55
2 independent electrical contacts
Rating: 4 A, 440 V (AC - 15 A)
1 227 33 Kit for front control with padlocking of door
66

66 33

Cat.No 224 94
17.5 12
33.5

75.5

48.5

■ Mounting of kit Cat.No 227 33

Usable depth (x)


min. max.
Without 85 mm 100 mm
kit axis
With 125 mm 255 mm
kit axis

213
full load switch units full load switch units
12 and 25 A - IP 65 technical characteristics
proximity switching

■ Technical characteristics
Conform to IEC 60947-3, VDE 0113, NF EN 60947-3, IEC 60204-1
NF EN 60204-1
Ithe (thermal current in enclosure) = 12 A for 12 A - 25 A for 25 A
IP 65 according to IEC 60529 and NF C 20-070
Insulating voltage UI = 690 V - Self-extinguishing at 960°

Duty categories
226 60/62 226 00/04
AC 21 12 A (8.5 kW) 25 A (17 kW)
AC 3
3 x 400 V 7 A (5.5 kW) 13.5 A (7.5 kW)
3 x 690 V 3.5 A (3 kW) 8 A (7.5 kW)
226 60 226 02

Connection
For on-load circuit breaking, isolation and locking equipment located 12 A: Max. 4 mm2 (fixed) - 2.5 mm2 (flexible)
remotely from a control cabinet 4 entries: 2 top, 2 bottom - Ø 19 mm PG 11 (Ø cable 10 mm max.)
Applications: 25 A: Max. 6 mm2 (fixed) - 6 mm2 (flexible with lugs)
Motors, fixed or mobile machines, air conditioners 4 entries: 2 top, 2 bottom - Ø 23 mm PG 16 (Ø cable 14 mm max.)
Can also be used as a:
• general switch
• emergency breaker
• emergency stop
Totally isolated enclosure - IP 65 ■ Dimensions
Black base
Red front-mounted rotary knob on yellow background for immediate visual 12 A 25 A
identification from a distance (position 0: open, position I: closed) Cat.Nos 226 60/62 Cat.Nos 226 00/02/04
The rotary knob can take up to 4 padlocks (Ø 6 mm)
in position 0
76

120

109
Pack Cat.Nos 12 A - IK 08
76 58
For breaking/isolating a single speed motor 97
Supplied complete with 2 x 6 mm2 relay terminal 96 ø 4.5 77
109
1 226 60 3-pole
1 226 62 3-pole + N
N can be used as a contact for report of position Fixing centres
12 A 25 A
Cat.Nos 226 60/62 Cat.Nos 226 00/02/04

25 A - IK 07
65

Supplied complete with 2 anti-fraud locking screws


109

and 1 relay terminal for continuity of neutral or earth


50
(2 x 10 mm2)
Ø 4.5 (for screw M4)
For breaking/isolating a single speed motor
Ø 4.5 (for screw M4)
1 226 00 3-pole
Can incorporate a contact for remote control
1 226 02 3-pole + N
N can be used as a contact for report of position
For breaking/isolating a two-speed motor
1 226 04 6-pole

214
full load isolating switch units full load isolating switch units
32 to 160 A - IP 65 technical characteristics

■ Electrical characteristics
Identical to corresponding Vistop isolating switch

Switch units Cat.Nos Characteristics


32 A 226 05/07 Vistop 32 A p. 85
63 A 226 15/17 Vistop 63 A p. 86
100 A 226 25/27 Vistop 100 A p. 86
125 A 226 33/34 Vistop 125 A p. 86
160 A 226 35/37 Vistop 160 A p. 86

■ Dimensions 32 to 160 A
C E

A
226 37

B D

Units Cat.Nos A B C D E
226 17 supplied 226 05/07 32 A 200 160 218 93 93
with 2
cable glands 226 15/17 63 A 290 190 263 95 102
226 25/27/33/34 100/125 A 332 262 316 132 132
226 07 226 35/37 160 A 382 292 346 132 132

Vistop with side red handle, yellow front plate version mounted in a IP 65
plastic boxes with transparent hinged cover
Fitted with an auxiliary N/C + N/O contact for position signal
Vistop padlockable in open position
For agricultural machinery, textile industry machines, printing presses,
wood-working or plastic industries, lifting bridges, industrial process
rotating electrical machines

Pack Cat.Nos Switch units with full load break isolating


switches Vistop - IK 07
32 A
Supplied with 2 cable glands 21 P - ISO 25
Earth terminal
Connection nominal capacity
1 226 05 3 P
16 mm2 cage terminals 10 mm2
1 226 07 4 P
63 A
Supplied with 2 cable glands 29 P - ISO 32
1 226 15 3 P cage terminals 50 mm2
1 226 17 4 P 2
50 mm flexible 50 mm2
70 mm2 rigid
100 A
Supplied with 2 cable glands 36 P - ISO 50
1 226 25 3 P cage terminals 50 mm2
1 226 27 4 P 50 mm2 flexible 50 mm2
70 mm2 rigid
125 A
Supplied with 2 cable glands 36 P - ISO 50
1 226 33 3 P cage terminals 50 mm2
1 226 34 4 P 50 mm2 flexible 50 mm2
70 mm2 rigid
160 A
Supplied with 2 cable glands 36 P - ISO 50
1 226 35 3 P cage terminals 50 mm2
1 226 37 4 P 50 mm2 flexible 50 mm2

215
[ P R OT E CT I O N ] Products and systems

LR residual current circuit


breakers and switches
The new LR range provides a simple solution for the protection
requirements of people and property on the domestic market. It is
easy to incorporate in Ekinoxe NX distribution cabinets: an efficient,
high-performance system

The range
40 A

TYPE AC
20 mA

I - ON

RCDs O- OFF

• Ratings 25 to 63 A
• Sensitivity 30, 100 and 300 mA Socket
• 2 P and 4 P circuits
• Surface mounted cylindrical
test button

C16 C16 C16 C20 C20

I - ON I - ON I - ON I - ON I - ON

O- OFF O- OFF O- OFF O- OFF O- OFF

EKINOXE NX
16 A 16 A 16 A 20 A 20 A
• A range from 4 to 36 modules
flush or surface mounting 2.52 2.52 2.52 2.52 2.52
• White and transparent plastic
door or white metal door

Legrand advantages

1 Complete, short range


N Neutral

2 Special marking on front panel


L Phase

3 Clamps at the bottom for fixing on rail Earth

216
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
• Ratings 2 to 63 A
• 1 P, 2 P, 3 P, 4 P
• B and C curves
• Breaking capacity:
±
10 000 A on 127/220 V mains supply
±
6 000 A on 230/400 V mains supply

C10 C20 C32 C16 C16

I - ON I - ON I - ON I - ON I - ON

O- OFF O- OFF O- OFF O- OFF O- OFF

FOR MORE INFORMATION


See the on-line catalogue:
instructions, technical data sheets, etc.

217
NEW
LRTM 6 000
thermal magnetic MCBs from 6 A to 63 A
B and C curves

6048 96 6048 50

Dimensions (p. 237)

Conform to IEC 60898


Breaking capacity:
6 000 - IEC 60898 - 230/400 V ±±
6 kA - IEC 60947-2 - 230/400 V
10 000 - IEC 60898 - 127/220 V ±±
10 kA - IEC 60947-2 - 127/220 V
Do not accept auxiliaries

Pack Cat.Nos Single pole - 230/400 V ± Pack Cat.Nos 3-pole - 400 V ±


B curve C curve In Number of modules B curve C curve In Number of modules
10 6049 02 6048 02 6A 1 1 6049 32 6048 32 6A 3
10 6049 03 6048 03 10 A 1 1 6049 33 6048 33 10 A 3
10 6049 04 6048 04 13 A 1 1 6048 34 13 A 3
10 6049 05 6048 05 16 A 1 1 6049 35 6048 35 16 A 3
10 6049 06 6048 06 20 A 1 1 6049 36 6048 36 20 A 3
10 6049 07 6048 07 25 A 1 1 6049 37 6048 37 25 A 3
10 6049 08 6048 08 32 A 1 1 6049 38 6048 38 32 A 3
10 6049 09 6048 09 40 A 1 1 6049 39 6048 39 40 A 3
10 6049 10 6048 10 50 A 1 1 6049 40 6048 40 50 A 3
10 6049 11 6048 11 63 A 1 1 6049 41 6048 41 63 A 3

Single pole + neutral(1) - 230 V ± 3-pole + neutral(1) - 400 V ±


C curve In Number of modules C curve In Number of modules
5 6048 90 6A 2 1 6047 96 6A 4
5 6048 91 10 A 2 1 6048 94 10 A 4
5 6048 92 13 A 2 1 6048 95 13 A 4
5 6048 93 16 A 2 1 6048 96 16 A 4
5 6047 90 20 A 2 1 6048 97 20 A 4
5 6047 91 25 A 2 1 6048 98 25 A 4
5 6047 92 32 A 2 1 6048 99 32 A 4
5 6047 97 40 A 4
2-pole - 400 V ± 1 6047 98 50 A 4
1 6047 99 63 A 4
B curve C curve In Number of modules
5 6049 17 6048 17 6A 2
5
5
6049 18
6049 19
6048 18
6048 19
10 A
13 A
2
2
4-pole - 400 V ±
C curve In Number of modules
5 6049 20 6048 20 16 A 2 1 6048 47 6A 4
5 6049 21 6048 21 20 A 2 1 6048 48 10 A 4
5 6049 22 6048 22 25 A 2 1 6048 50 16 A 4
5 6049 23 6048 23 32 A 2 1 6048 51 20 A 4
5 6049 24 6048 24 40 A 2 1 6048 52 25 A 4
5 6049 25 6048 25 50 A 2 1 6048 53 32 A 4
5 6049 26 6048 26 63 A 2 1 6048 54 40 A 4
1 6048 55 50 A 4
1 6048 56 63 A 4

(1) Neutral on right-hand side

Red catalogue numbers: New products

218
NEW
LRTM RCD LRTM
AC and A types technical characteristics

■ MCBs
Technical characteristics
• Maximun AC voltage : 230 - 400 V ±
=
• Maximun DC voltage : 80 V per pole
±
• Insulation voltage : 500 V
±
• Dielectric : 2 500 V
• Curves : B and C
• Rating : 6 to 63 A
• Pole : 1 P, 1 P + N, 2 P, 3 P, 3 P + N, 4 P
• Conform to IEC 60898
6021 93 6021 53 Mechanical characteristics
Endurance : 20 000 mechanical switching operation
10 000 on load switching operation at cos ϕ 0.9
Dimensions (p. 237) Connection cross section (in mm2) : 252 flexible cables
352 rigid cables
Applied connection torque : 2.5 Nm
Conform to IEC 61008-1 Agrements
VDE, ANCE
Pack Cat.Nos 2-pole - 230 V ±
AC type A type 30 mA
Nominal rating
(A)
Number
of modules
■ RCD
1 6021 36 25 2 Technical characteristics
1 6021 37 6021 93 40 2 • Type : AC and A
1 6021 38 63 2 • Sensitivity : 30 mA, 100 mA, 300 mA
• Pole : 2 P and 4 P
100 mA • Rating : 25, 40, 63 A
1 6021 39 25 2 • conform to IEC/EN 61008-1
1 6021 40 40 2 Mechanical characteristics
300 mA Endurance : 20 000 mechanical switching operation
10 000 on load switching operation at cos ϕ 0.9
1 6021 42 25 2 2 000 via test
1 6021 43 40 2 2 000 by fault current
Connection cross section (in mm2) : 252 flexible cables
1 6021 44 63 2 352 rigid cables

4-pole(1) - 400 V ±
AC type A type 30 mA
Nominal rating Number
(A) of modules
1 6021 46 25 4
1 6021 47 6021 94 40 4
1 6021 95 63 4
100 mA
1 6021 49 25 4
1 6021 50 40 4
300 mA
1 6021 52 25 4
1 6021 53 40 4

(1) Neutral on right-hand side

Red catalogue numbers: New products

219
] Products and systems

Modular
LEXIC

din-rail equipement
[

Lexic, Legrand's modular wiring accessories for rails 2, give you


the freedom to organise your distribution board as you please,
and give you a complete and innovative choice of functions

Choice

isolating add-on signalling


MCB switch RCD RCBO module auxiliary

command voltage surge push-button,


auxiliary motor MCB protector fuse carrier control switch indicators

pulse operated time-lag time delay light sensitive programmable


latching relay contactor switch relay switch time switch

buzzer, dimmer,
transformer bell socket outlet thermostat power supply remote dimmer

analogue energy digital energy measuring


Imocad metering device metering device central unit

220
LEXIC FREEDOM LEXIC SIMPLICITY LEXIC
OF INSTALLATION OF INSTALLATION OPERATIONAL SAFETY
• Standardised information
marking
Nominal
Rating

Cat.No

Breaking
Curve capacity

Class
• The auxiliaries common
• Busbar attachment to MCBS, isolating switches
• Distribution via busbar and RCDs, are mounted • Labelling using integrated
to the left of the devices label-holder on the device
• Add-on modules are mounted
to the right of MCBS
• Each device can be renoved
independently, without
unscrewing

• Organisation of rows
• Alignment quality of rows
• IP 2x screw terminals

FOR MORE INFORMATION


Come and be trained Consult the E-Catalogue: Agent export
at Innoval Instructions, technical
data sheets, etc.

221
LEXIC

DX-E 6 000 - 6 kA
thermal magnetic MCBs from 6 to 63 A
B and C curves DXTM 6 000 , 6 kA >>>
Protection,
identification
032 70 034 33 033 28
and information
Dimensions (p. 237)
Technical characteristics (p. 76 and p. 77)
feedback
Breaking capacity
6 000 - IEC 60898 - 400 V AA
6 kA - IEC 60947-2 - 400 V

Pack Cat.Nos Single pole - 230/400 V ±


B C Nominal rating Number
curve curve (A) of modules
10 032 66 033 82 6 1
10 032 68 033 84 10 1
10 032 69 033 85 13 1
10 032 70 033 86 16 1
10 032 71 033 87 20 1
10 032 72 033 88 25 1
10 032 73 033 89 32 1
10 032 74 033 90 40 1
10 032 75 033 91 50 1
10 032 76 033 92 63 1

2-pole - 400 V ±
B C Nominal rating Number
curve curve (A) of modules
5 033 08 034 29 6 2
5 033 10 034 31 10 2
5 033 11 034 32 13 2
5 033 12 034 33 16 2
5 033 13 034 34 20 2
5 033 14 034 35 25 2
5 033 15 034 36 32 2
5 033 16 034 37 40 2
5 033 17 034 38 50 2
5 033 18 034 39 63 2

3-pole - 400 V ±
B C Nominal rating Number
curve curve (A) of modules
1 033 22 034 47 6 3
1 033 24 034 49 10 3
1 033 25 034 50 13 3
1 033 26 034 51 16 3
1 033 27 034 52 20 3
1
1
033 28
033 29
034 53
034 54
25
32
3
3
> Protection devices in consumer
1 033 30 034 55 40 3 units should always be
1 033 31 034 56 50 3
1 033 32 034 57 63 3 identifiable to allow immediate
intervention.
4-pole - 400 V ±
B
curve
C
curve
Nominal rating
(A)
Number
of modules
> The DXTM 6 000 has a label-holder,
1 033 68 034 89 6 4 ensuring that the protected circuit
1 033 70 034 91 10 4
1 033 71 034 92 13 4 is immediately identifiable, and
1 033 72 034 93 16 4
1 033 73 034 94 20 4 provides information feedback via
1 033 74 034 95 25 4
1 033 75 034 96 32 4 its auxiliairies.
1 033 76 034 97 40 4
1 033 77 034 98 50 4
1 033 78 034 99 63 4

Auxiliaries and accessories


for MCBs (p. 232)
Residual current devices (p. 224)

222
DXTM - IS
isolating switches
visible load break

073 61 023 58 043 22 043 26 043 74

Dimensions (p. 237)


Technical characteristics (p. 76 and p. 77)

Mounting on rail 4 EN 60715


Breaking capacity AC 22 A according to IEC 60947 - 3
Double break contacts

Pack Cat.Nos Remote trip head isolating switches Pack Cat.Nos Isolating switches (continued)

NEW
Visual indication of the actual state of the contacts: 3 P - 400 V ±
• Closed position or fault (red Led-I) Nominal Number
• Open position (green Led) on handle rating (A) of modules
In the event of a fault on opening, the red position 5 043 42 20 2
indicator signals the faulty pole, the handle in the 5 043 45 32 2
central position 3 043 47 40 3
Red handle (head device) 3 043 50 63 3
Common auxiliaries to DX (p. 122)